Geography 2011 (UK) by Routledge Taylor & Francis Group

Routledge

View any

product

online using the urls below each listing

Geography New Titles and Key Backlist 2011 Urban Studies Development Studies Environmental Studies Tourism

www.routledge.com/geography

Routledge Perspectives on Development Series Theories and Practices of Development Second Edition

Complim enta Exam Co ry py Available

Professor Katie Willis, Reader in Development Geography and Director of the Centre for Developing Areas Research at Royal Holloway, University of London

1-34 See pages 3 tles ti re o for m ries. from this se

‘Theories and Practices of Development is a clear and concise introductory text which provides an excellent and accessible ‘way in’ for undergraduate students to critically engage with a range of contemporary development debates.’ Theories and Practices of Development provides a clear and user-friendly introduction to the complex debates around how development has been understood and achieved. The second edition has been fully updated and expanded to reflect global political and economic shifts, as well as new approaches to development. The rise of China and India is given particular attention, as is the global economic crisis and its implications for development theories and practice. There are new sections on faith-based development, and the development dimensions of climate change, as well as greater engagement with development theories as they are put into practice in the Global North. February 2011 Hb: 978-0-415-59070-9: £75.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-59071-6: £22.99

Visit www.routledge.com to request your complimentary exam copy today.

Other titles in the series include: Water Resources and Development

Economics and Development Studies

By Clive Agnew, Philip Woodhouse

By Michael Tribe, Frederick Nixson, Andy Sumner

Economics and Development Studies makes the economic dimension of discourse around controversial issues in international development accessible to second and third year undergraduate students working towards degrees in development studies. August 2010 Pb: 978-0-415-45038-6: £24.99

Why not browse online content before making your purchasing decision? Visit our website for more information. Find out more about the Routledge Perspectives on Development series, visit www.routledge.com

www.routledge.com/geography

Welcome to Routledge

Geography New Titles and Key Backlist 2011

contents Human Geography Textbooks. . . . . . . . . . 2

Development Studies Textbooks. . . . . . . 30

Key Ideas in Geography Series . . . . . . . . . 5

Routledge Perspectives on Development Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Considering books for course use?

Human Geography Reference. . . . . . . . . 11

Environmental Studies Textbooks . . . . . . 40

This symbol shows books that are available as complimentary exam copies for lecturers or faculty considering them for course adoption. To obtain your copy visit the URL listed beneath the title in the catalog and select your choice of print or electronic copy. Visit www.routledge.com or in the US you can call 1-800-634-7064.

Urban Studies Textbooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Environmental Studies Supplementary Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

This symbol shows books that are available as electronic inspection copies only.

Human Geography Supplementary Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Human Geography Research Monographs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Routledge Critical Introductions to Urbanism and the City Series . . . . . . . . 15

Development Studies Supplementary Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Development Research Monographs. . . . 39

Urban Studies Supplementary Reading. . . 16

Environmental Studies Research Monographs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Urban Studies Research Monographs. . . 21

Physical Geography Textbooks . . . . . . . . 49

Urban Studies Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Physical Geography Supplementary Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Tourism Textbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tourism Supplementary Reading. . . . . . . 26 Tourism Research Monographs. . . . . . . . 27

Physical Geography Reference . . . . . . . . 54 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Order Form. . . . . . . . . . . . Back of Catalog

uk and rest of world

us, canada and latin america

Marketing:

Natalie Butler – Marketing Manager

David Jurman – Marketing Manager

Email: natalie.butler@tandf.co.uk

Email: david.jurman@taylorandfrancis.com

Zoe Miller – Marketing Assistant

Samantha Barbaro – Marketing Assistant

Email: zoe.miller@tandf.co.uk

Email: samantha.barbaro@taylorandfrancis.com

Editorial:

Journals:

Andrew Mould – Publisher

Online: www.informaworld.com/journals Email: customerservice@taylorandfrancis.com Call: Toll Free: 1-800-354-1420

Emma Travis – Tourism Editor Email: emma.travis@tandf.co.uk

Faye Leerink – Editorial Assistant Email: faye.leerink@tandf.co.uk

Journals:

Ordering online is fast and efficient, simply follow the on-screen instructions. Alternatively, you can call, fax, or see order form at the back of this catalog. UK and Rest of World Call: +44 (0)1235 400524 Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699 US, Canada and Latin America Call: 1-800-634-7064 Fax: 1-800-248-4724

Contacts

Email: andrew.mould@tandf.co.uk

The Easy Way to Order

Overseas: 1-215-625-8900

eBook and Online Sales: Email: e-reference@taylorandfrancis.com Call: 1-888-318-2367

Online: www.informaworld.com/journals Email: tf.enquiries@informa.com Call: +44 (0)20 7017 5544 eBook and Online Sales: Email: online.sales@tandf.co.uk Call: +44 (0)20 7017 6062

eUpdates Register your email address at www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates to receive information on books, journals and other news within your area of interest.

Trade Customers’ Representatives, Agents and Distribution For a complete list, visit: www.routledge.com/representatives.

eBooks There are over 23,000 eBooks available across the humanities, social sciences, behavioural sciences, STM and law from some of the world’s leading imprints for individual and institutional purchase.

– Individuals Download full titles or just the pages or chapters needed. You can also print or copy pages or chapters of choice, compile your own eBook or rent a title for 1 day, right up to 6 months. Full details are on www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk.

– Libraries and Institutions

Prices, publication dates and content are correct at time of going to press, but may be subject to change without notice.

Subscribe or purchase a ready made package or pick & mix your own from our complete collection (50 title minimum). 30 day free trials are available. For more information, visit: www.ebooksubscriptions.com or contact your local sales team.

hu m a n geography tex tbook s

Human Geography Textbooks Economic Geography Places, Networks and Flows Andrew Wood and Susan Roberts both at University of Kentucky, USA

Economic Geography provides a stimulating and innovative introduction to economic geography by establishing the substantive concerns of economic geographers, the methods deployed to study them, the key concepts and theories that animate the field, and the major issues generating debate. This book is the first to address the diverse approaches to economic geography as well as the constantly shifting economic geographies on the ground. It encompasses traditional approaches, albeit from a critical perspective, while providing a thorough, accessible and engaging examination of the concerns, methods and approaches of the ‘new economic geography’. This unique introductory text covers the breadth of economic geography while engaging with a range of contemporary debates at the cutting-edge of the field. Written in an accessible and lucid style, this book offers a thorough and systematic introductory survey. It is enhanced by pedagogical features throughout including case studies dealing with topics ranging from the head office locations of the Fortune 500, Mexico’s maquiladoras to China’s investments in southern Africa. This book also contains exercises based on the key concepts and annotated further reading and websites. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Traditional Economic Geographies 2. Traditional Location Theory 3. Modeling Economic Geographies Part 2: Geographies of the Firm and Other Institutions 4. The Geographies of the Firm 5. Going Global Part 3: Geographies of Uneven Development 6. Geographic Inequalities 7. The Changing Fortunes of Local and Regional Economies Part 4: Geographies of Networks, Places and Flows 8. Economic Geography ’Unbound’ 9. Conclusions 2010: 246 x 189: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-40181-4: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40182-1: £23.99

Forthcoming

2nd Edition

Geographies of Globalization

An Introduction to the Geography of Health

Warwick Murray, Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand

Peter Anthamatten, University of Colorado, Denver, USA and Helen Hazen, Macalester College, USA

Series: Routledge Contemporary Human Geography Series

Geographies of Globalization offers a lively exploration of the geographical impacts of globalization and the distinctive contribution of human geography to studies and debates in this field. Fully up-to-date and engaging, this work: • critically appraises the concept and processes of globalization from a geographical perspective • debates the historical evolution of globalized society • illustrates how the core principles of human geography – such as space and scale – lead to a better understanding of the phenomenon • analyzes the interconnected economic, political and cultural geographies of globalization • examines the impact of global transformations ‘on the ground’ using examples from seven continents • discusses the challenges for the environment and the Third World created by globalizing processes • articulates a human geographical framework for progressive globalization. Boxed sections highlight key concepts and innovative work by geographers. The book is also illustrated with a wide range of figures, photographs, and maps. Geographies of Globalization is indispensable for human geography undergraduates and postgraduates studying the phenomenon in both dedicated and linked courses. Selected Contents: Part 1: Globalization in Three Dimensions – Place, Time and Space 1. Globalization and Place – Geography is Dead? 2. Globalization and Crisis – Three World Challenges 3. Globalization, Time and Space – History and Theory Part 2: Globalization in Three Spheres – Economic, Cultural and Political 4. Globalizing Economic Geographies 5. Globalizing Cultural Geographies 6. Globalizing Political Geographies Part 3: Globalization and Three Crises – Development, Environment and Uneven Capitalism 7. Inequality, Development and Globalization 8. Environment, Sustainability and Globalization 9. Uneven Capitalism, Globalization and Recession 10. Progressive Globalization – Long Live Geography December 2011: 234 x 156: 416pp Hb: 978-0-415-56761-9: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56762-6: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86019-9 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415567626

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415401821

An Introduction to the Geography of Health provides an accessible introduction to this rapidly growing field, covering theoretical and methodological background. The text is divided into three sections, which consider distinct approaches and techniques related to health geographies. Section one introduces ecological approaches, with a focus on how natural and built environments affect human health. For instance, how have irrigation projects influenced the spread of water-borne diseases? How can modern healthcare settings, such as hospitals, affect the spread and evolution of pathogens? Section two discusses social aspects of health and healthcare, considering health as not merely a biological interaction between a pathogen and human host, but as a process that is situated among social factors which ultimately drive who suffers from what and where disease occurs. Section three then considers spatial techniques and approaches to exploring health, giving special focus to the growing role of cartography and geographic information systems (GIS) in the study of health. This clearly written text contains a range of pedagogical features including a wealth of global case studies, discussion questions and suggestions for further reading at the end of each chapter, a colour plate section and over eighty diagrams and figures. The accompanying website also provides presentations, exercises, further resources, and tables and figures. This book is an essential introductory text for undergraduate students studying Geography, Health and Social Studies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Section 1: Ecological Approaches to Human Health 2. Ecological Approaches to Human Health and Environmental Change 3. Demographic Change and Emerging and Resurgent Infectious Diseases 4. Environmental Exposures Section 2: Social Approaches to Health and Healthcare 5. Social and Economic Environments 6. Culture and Identity 7. Power and Politics of Health 8. Geographies of Healthcare Section 3: Spatial Approaches to Human Health 9. Cartography and Visualization of Health Data 10. Health and GIS 11. Integrating Approaches to the Study of the Geography of Health June 2011: 246 x 189: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-49805-0: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49806-7: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87746-3 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415498067

Order Yours Today! For simple and secure online ordering, please visit www.routledge.com/geography Or use the order form at the back of this catalog.

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

h uman g e og r ap hy te x tbo o k s

Forthcoming

2nd Edition

Human Geography: The Basics

Introduction to Geopolitics Colin Flint, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, USA This clear and concise introduction to the field of geopolitics highlights how geographic factors are important in determining whether tensions become conflicts, and whether or not resolutions are just and long-lasting.

Andrew Jones, University of London, UK

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415667739

Forthcoming 2nd Edition

Territories The Claiming of Space David Storey, University of Worcester, UK The extensively revised and updated second edition continues to provide an introduction to theories of territoriality and the outcomes of territorial control and resistance. It explores the construction of territories and the conflicts which often result using a range of examples drawn from various spatial scales and from many different countries. It ranges in coverage from conflicts over national territory (such as Israel/Palestine, Northern Ireland, South Ossetia) to divisions of space based around class, gender and race. While retaining the key elements of the first edition, this new edition covers contemporary debates on nationalism, territorialization, globalization and borders. It updates the factual content to explore the territorial consequences of ‘9/11’, the ‘war on terror and the conflicts in Iraq and Afghanistan. It also examines migration, refugees, the territorial expansion of the European Union, and territorial divisions in the home and workplace. The book emphasizes the underlying processes associated with territorial strategies and raises important questions relating to place, culture and identity. Key questions emerge concerning geographic space, who is ‘allowed’ to be in particular spaces and who is barred, discouraged or excluded. Written from a geographical perspective, the book is inter-disciplinary, drawing on ideas and material from a range of academic disciplines including, history, political science, sociology, international relations, cultural studies. Each chapter contains boxed case studies, illustrations and guides to further reading. November 2011: 234 x 156: 276pp Hb: 978-0-415-57549-2: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57550-8: £22.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85457-0 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415575508

Edited by Timothy Oakes and Patricia L. Price

Series: The Basics

Selected Contents: Prologue 1. A Framework for Understanding Geopolitics 2. Setting the Global Geopolitical Context 3. Geopolitical Codes: Agents Define their Geopolitical Options 4. Representations of Geopolitical Codes 5. Embedding Geopolitics within National Identity 6. Boundary Geopolitics: Shaky Foundations of the World Political Map? 7. Geopolitical Metageographies: Terrorist Networks and the United States’ War on Terrorism 8. Messy Geopolitics: Agency and Multiple Structures December 2011: 246 x 174: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-66772-2: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-66773-9: £25.99

The Cultural Geography Reader

Human Geography: The Basics is a concise introduction to the study of the role that mankind plays in shaping the world around us. Whether its environmental concerns, the cities we live in or the globalization of the economy, these are issues that affect us all. This book introduces these topics and more including: • migration, immigration and asylum

• international security and terrorism • travel and tourism • agriculture and food. Featuring end of chapter summaries, case study boxes, further reading lists and a glossary, this book is the ideal introduction for anybody new to the study of human geography. December 2011: 198 x 129 Hb: 978-0-415-57551-5: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57552-2: £11.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415575522

Understanding Cultural Geography Places and Traces Jon Anderson, Cardiff University, UK Understanding Cultural Geography: Places and Traces offers a broad-based overview of cultural geography, ideal for students being introduced to the discipline through either undergraduate or postgraduate degree courses. The book outlines how the theoretical ideas, empirical foci and methodological techniques of cultural geography illuminate and make sense of the places we inhabit and contribute to. This is a timely synthesis that aims to incorporate a vast knowledge foundation and by doing so it will also prove invaluable for lecturers and academics alike.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The History of Cultural Geography 3. Branching Out: Twenty-first Century Developments in the Family Tree of Cultural Geography 4. Knowing (your) Place 5. Taking and Making Place: the Stuff of Power 6. Counter Cultures: Global, Corporate, and Anti-Capitalisms 7. The Place of Nature 8.The Place of Ethnicity 9. Senses of Place: Scales and Beliefs 10. Making and Marking New Places: The Cultural Geographies of Youth 11. (B)ordering the Body 12. Swimming in Context: Doing Cultural Geography in Practice 13. A Culturally Geographical Approach to Place 2009: 246 x 189: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-43054-8: £99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43055-5: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87237-6 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415430555

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

Selected Contents: Section 1: Approaching Culture Section 2: Cultural Geography: A Transatlantic Genealogy Section 3: Landscape Section 4: Nature Section 5: Identity and Place in a Global Context Section 6: Home and Away Section 7: Geographies of Difference Section 8: Culture as Resource

2007: 246 x 189: 496pp Hb: 978-0-415-41873-7: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41874-4: £32.99 eBook: 978-0-203-93195-0 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415418744

2nd Edition

The Making of the American Landscape Edited by Michael P. Conzen, University of Chicago, USA

’Michael Conzen has re-assembled a superb line up of authors renowned for their capacity to see detail and interpret the big picture. Chapters have been updated, especially through an expanded array of historical and contemporary views of landscapes, and several new authors make this an even more compelling text.’ – Deryck Holdsworth, Pennsylvania State University This is the only compact yet comprehensive survey of environmental and cultural forces that have shaped the visual character and geographical diversity of the settled American landscape. It examines the large-scale historical influences that have molded the varied human adaptation of the continent’s physical topography to its needs over more than 500 years. It presents a synoptic view of myriad historical processes working together or in conflict, and illustrates them through their survival in or disappearance from the everyday landscapes of today.

Selected Contents: 1. Nature’s Bequest 2. Indian Settlement Landscapes 3. Hispanic Landscape Traditions 4. The French Imprint on North America 5. Americanizing English Landscape Habits 6. The Plantation Regime 7. Gridding a National Landscape 8. Clearing the Forests 9. Remaking the Prairies 10. Watering the Deserts 11. Designing American Utopias 12. Inscribing Ethnicity on the Land 13. Organizing Religious Landscapes 14. Mechanizing the American Earth 15. Building American Cityscapes 16. Asserting Central Authority 17. Creating Landscapes of Civil Society 18. Imposing Landscapes of Private Power and Wealth 19. Paving America for the Automobile 20. Developing Corporate Consumption Venues 2010: 246 x 189: 568pp Hb: 978-0-415-95006-0: £99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95007-7: £33.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415950077

hu m a n geography tex tbook s

Young People, Place and Identity Peter E. Hopkins, Newcastle University, UK The textbook is one of the first books to map out the scales, themes and sites engaged with by young people on a daily basis as they construct their multiple identities. The scales explored here include the body, neighbourhood and community, mobilities and transitions and urban-rural settings and how these all shape and are shaped by young people’s identities. Each chapter explores how social identities (such as race, gender, sexuality, class, disability and religion) are constructed within particular contexts and influenced by multiple processes of inclusion and exclusion. These discussions are supported by details of the research methods and ethical issues involved in researching young people’s lives. Drawing upon research from a range of contexts, including Europe, North America and Australasia, this book demonstrates the complex ways in which young people creatively shape, contest and resist their engagements with different places and identities. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Researching Young People, Place and Identity 2. Research with Young People 3. Ethical and Methodological Considerations Part 2: Scales 4. Body 5. Home 6. Neighbourhood and Community 7. Nation 8. Global Part 3: Themes and Sites 9. Institutions 10. The Street and Public Space 11. Migration, Mobilities and Transition 12. Urban-rural 13. Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-45437-7: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45439-1: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85232-3 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415454391

The Middle East Today Political, Geographical and Cultural Perspectives Dona Stewart, Georgia State University, USA The Middle East Today is an accessible and comprehensive introductory textbook for undergraduate students of Middle East Studies, Middle East politics and geography. The book features a host of pedagogical features to assist students with their learning. These include detailed maps, case studies on key issues, boxed sections and suggestions for further reading. In addition, the book is further supplemented by a companion website that contains sample chapters, a selection of maps formatted for use in presentations, annotated links to online resources and websites and hints and pointers for answering the end of chapter questions. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction to the Region 1. The Middle East and North Africa: Between Image and Reality 2. The Geography of the Middle East and North Africa Part 2: Emergence and Evolution of the Region 3. The Contemporary State System 4. Historical Foundations 5. The Making of the Modern State System 6. The Emergence of Independent States and Geopolitics 7. Contemporary Islamist Thought Part 3: Contemporary Issues and Challenges 8. The Arab-Israeli Conflicts: A Conflict Resolution Perspective 9. The Struggle for Economic and Social Development 10. ‘Democracy’ and Political Transformation Part 4: The Future of the Region 11. The Coming Challenges: Key Issues to Watch 2009: 246 x 189: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-77243-3: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77242-6: £24.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415772426

2nd edition

New

The Geography of Transport Systems

2nd Edition

Jean-Paul Rodrigue, Hofstra University, USA, Claude Comtois, University of Montreal, Canada and Brian Slack, Concordia University, Canada

Interpreting Sustainability in the Planning Process

The second edition of The Geography of Transport Systems maintains the overall structure of its predecessor, with chapters dealing with specific conceptual dimensions and methodologies, but the contents have been revised and updated.

Some key points of the second edition: • updated and revised conceptual and methodological material to reflect the most current issues in transport geography • a case study for each chapter addressing a real world transportation geography issue • reorganization of the text to improve readability and continuity • updated and improved figures and maps • continuously updated and revised supporting web site. Mainly aimed at an undergraduate audience, this edition of The Geography of Transport Systems provides a comprehensive and accessible introduction to the field with a broad overview of its concepts, methods and areas of application. It is highly illustrated and a companion web site has also been enhanced for the book. It contains PowerPoint slides, exercises, databases and GIS datasets and can be accessed at http://people. hofstra.edu/geotrans Selected Contents: 1. Transportation and Geography 2. Transportation and the Spatial Structure 3. Transportation and the Economy 4. Transportation Modes 5. Transportation Terminals 6. International Trade and Freight Distribution 7. Urban Transportation 8. Transport, Energy and Environment 9. Transport Planning and Policy 2009: 246 x 174: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-48323-0: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48324-7: £29.99 eBook: 978-0-203-88415-7

Land and Limits Susan Owens, University of Cambridge, UK and Richard Cowell, Cardiff University, UK Series: RTPI Library Series

The first edition of this seminal book was written at a time of rapidly growing interest in the potential for land use planning to deliver sustainable development; and explored the connections between the two and implications for public policy. In the decade since the book was first conceived, environmental imperatives have risen still further up the policial agenda and land use conflicts have intensified, lending even greater importance to the authors’ research. In a rigorous discussion of concepts, policy instruments, and contemporary planning dilemmas, the authors challenge prevailing assumptions about planning for sustainability. After charting the remarkable growth in expectations of planning, they show how attempts to interpret sustainability must lead to fundamental moral and political choices.

Selected Contents: Foreword John Forester Introduction 1. Old Conflicts and New Ideas 2. Rhetoric, Policy and Practice: Sustainable Development as a Planning Issue 3. Interpreting Sustainability 4. Defining and Defending: Approaches to Planning for Sustainability 5. Moving Targets: Planning for an Integrated Transport Policy 6. Planning for Biodiversity: Ethics, Policies and Practice 7. Distributing Development: Sustainability and Equity in Minerals Planning 8. Conclusions and Reflections 2010: 234 x 156: 220pp Pb: 978-0-415-48571-5: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415485715

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415483247

Also available: Handbook of Urban Ecology See page 23 for more details.

Textbook

An Atlas of Middle Eastern Affairs Ewan W. Anderson, University of Durham, UK and Liam D. Anderson, Wright State University, USA Illustrated by Ian Cool

The Middle East is a major focus of world interest. This atlas provides accessible, concisely written entries on the most important current issues in the Middle East, combining maps with their geopolitical background. Providing a clear context for analysis of key concerns, it includes background topics, the position of the Middle East in the world and profiles of the constituent countries. Selected Contents: Section 1: The Middle East in Context Section 2: The Middle Eastern Background: Geographical and Historical Section 3: Fundamental Concerns 1. Petroleum 2. Water 3. International Boundaries 4. Transboundary Issues Section 4: States of the Middle East Section 5: Key Issues 5. War and Conflict 6. Political Issues 7. The Israeli-Palestinian Question 8. Iraq 9. Afghanistan Section 6: Further Reading

2009: 246 x 174: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-45514-5: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45515-2: £22.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415455152

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

h uman g e og r ap hy te x tbo o k s

Mobility

Key Ideas in Geography

Peter Adey, Keele University, UK

Edited by Sarah Holloway and Gill Valentine The Key Ideas in Geography series will provide strong, original, and accessible texts on important spatial concepts for academics and students working in the fields of geography, sociology and anthropology, as well as the interdisciplinary fields of urban and rural studies, development and cultural studies. Each text will locate a key idea within its traditions of thought, provide grounds for understanding its various usages and meanings, and offer critical discussion of the contribution of relevant authors and thinkers.

Rural

Scale

Michael Woods, Aberystwyth University, UK

Andrew Herod, University of Georgia, USA

Rural provides an advanced introduction to the study of rural places and processes in Geography and related disciplines. Drawing extensively on the latest research in rural geography, this book explores the diverse meanings that have been attached to the rural, examines how ideas of the rural have been produced and reproduced, and investigates the influence of different ideas in shaping the social and economic structure of rural localities and the everyday lives of people who live, work or play in rural areas.

Scale provides a structured investigation of the debates concerning the concept of scale and how various geographical scales have been thought about within critical social theory. Specifically, the author examines how the scales of the body, the urban, the regional, the national, and the global have been conceptualized within Geography and the social sciences more broadly. The first part of the book provides a comprehensive overview of how different theoretical perspectives have regarded scale, especially debates over whether scales are real things or merely mental contrivances and/ or logical devices with which to think, as well as the consequences of thinking of them in areal versus in networked terms. The subsequent five chapters of the book then each takes a particular scale: the body; the urban; the regional; the national; the global and explores how it has been conceptualized and represented discursively for political and other purposes. A brief conclusion draws the book together by posing a number of questions about scale which emerge from the foregoing discussion.

This authoritative book contains case studies drawn from both the developed and developing world to introduce and illustrate conceptual ideas and approaches, as well as suggested further reading. Written in an engaging and lively style, Rural challenges the reader to think differently about the rural. Selected Contents: 1. Approaching the Rural 2. Imagining the Rural 3. Exploiting the Rural 4. Consuming the Rural 5. Developing the Rural 6. Living in the Rural 7. Performing the Rural 8. Regulating the Rural 9. Re-making the Rural 2010: 216 x 138: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-44239-8: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44240-4: £22.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415442404

The first single-author volume ever written on the subject of geographical scale, this book provides a unique overview in pushing understandings of scale in new and original directions. The accessible text is complimented by didactic boxes, and Scale serves as a valuable pedagogical reference for undergraduate and postgraduate audiences wishing to become familiar with such theoretical issues. Selected Contents: 1. What is Scale and How Do We Think About it? 2. The Body. 3. The Urban. 4. The Regional 5. The National 6. The Global 7. Conclusion 2010: 216 x 138: 312pp Hb: 978-0-415-34907-9: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-34908-6: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-64109-5 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415349086

Mobility is organized around themed chapters discussing Meanings, Politics, Practices and Mediations and identifies the evolution of mobility and its implications for theoretical debate. These implications include the way we think about travel and embodiment, to issues such as power, feminism and post-colonialism. Important contemporary case-studies are showcased in boxes. Examples range from the mobility politics evident in the evacuation of the flooding of New Orleans, xenophobia in Southern Africa, motoring in India, to the new social relationships emerging from the mobile phone. The methodological quandaries mobility demands are addressed through highlighted boxes discussing both qualitative and quantitative research methods. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Meaning 3. Politics 4. Practices 5. Mediations 6. Conclusion 2009: 216 x 138: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-43399-0: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43400-3: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87548-3 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415434003

Migration Michael Samers, University of Kentucky, USA Migration is an advanced, yet accessible, introduction to migration and immigration in a global context. It offers a critical, multi-disciplinary approach to the subject. It emphasizes a theoretical and conceptual approach to the study of migration. Specifically, it adopts a unique geographical approach by employing spatial concepts such as place, scale, and territory. The book covers such topics as migration categories, the explanation of different forms of migration, migration and employment, the geopolitics of migration and immigration and citizenship, rights, and belonging. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Explaining Migration Across International Borders 3. Geographies of Migration and Work 4. Geo-political Economies of Migration Control 5. Geographies of Migration, Citizenship and Belonging 6. Conclusions 2009: 216 x 138: 392pp Hb: 978-0-415-77665-3: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77666-0: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86429-6 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415776660

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Globalization

Edited by Charles Lemert, Anthony Elliott, Daniel Chaffee and Eric Hsu

2010

Paperback

978-0-415-46478-9

£23.99

Theories of Race and Racism

Edited by Les Back and John Solomos

2009

Paperback

978-0-415-41254-4

£25.99

Hardback

978-0-415-41253-7

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-38633-3

£27.99

Hardback

978-0-415-38632-6

£95.00

e-Book

978-0-203-93054-0

Contemporary Social Theory

Anthony Elliott and Anthony Elliott

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

2008

hu m a n geography tex tbook s

Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Emotions

Edited by Monica Greco and Paul Stenner

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-42563-6

£105.00

Paperback

978-0-415-42564-3

£27.99

Hardback

978-0-415-42463-9

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-42464-6

£24.99

Hardback

978-0-415-47169-5

£99.00

Paperback

978-0-415-47170-1

£32.99

Hardback

978-0-415-44581-8

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-44582-5

£27.99

Hardback

978-0-415-39695-0

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-39696-7

£26.99

e-Book

978-0-203-93363-3

Hardback

978-0-415-95372-6

£105.00

Paperback

978-0-415-95373-3

£42.00

Hardback

978-0-415-34143-1

£84.00

Paperback

978-0-415-34144-8

£22.99

e-Book

978-0-203-48016-8

Hardback

978-0-415-39168-9

£79.00

Paperback

978-0-415-39169-6

£24.99

e-Book

978-0-203-96752-2

Hardback

978-0-415-94852-4

£99.00

Paperback

978-0-415-94853-1

£20.99

e-Book

978-0-203-00306-0

Rethinking Landscape Geographic Thought Social Movements The Digital Economy

The Transnational Studies Reader Landscape

An Atlas of World Affairs

The Koreas Local and Regional Development

Home

Morocco The Geopolitics Reader Political Geography On Argentina and the Southern Cone Global Hong Kong Nature

How To Do Your Dissertation in Geography and Related Disciplines Australia Globalization and Social Change

Ian H. Thompson Edited by George Henderson and Marvin Waterstone Edited by Vincenzo Ruggiero and Nicola Montagna Edward J. Malecki and Bruno Moriset

Edited by Peggy Levitt and Sanjeev Khagram John Wylie

Andrew Boyd and Joshua Comenetz

Edited by Charles K. Armstrong Andy Pike, Andres Rodriguez-Pose and John Tomaney Alison Blunt and Robyn Dowling

Shana Cohen and Larabi Jaidi Edited by Simon Dalby, Paul Routledge and Gerard Toal Mark Blacksell Alejandro Grimson and Gabriel Kessler Cindy Wong and Gary McDonogh Noel Castree

Peter G. Knight and Tony Parsons

Anthony Moran Diane Perrons

How to do your Essays, Exams and Coursework in Geography and Related Disciplines

Peter Knight and Tony Parsons

Cultural Geography

Mike Crang

Complimentary Exam Copy

2008 2008 2008 2007

2007 2007

2007

2006 2006

2006

2006 2006 2005 2005 2005 2005

2004

2004 2004

2003 1998

Paperback

978-0-415-35718-0

£28.99

Hardback

978-0-415-35717-3

£105.00

Hardback

978-0-415-33274-3

£84.00

Paperback

978-0-415-33275-0

£22.99

e-Book

978-0-203-40135-4

Paperback

978-0-415-94511-0

£20.99

Hardback

978-0-415-94510-3

£99.00

Paperback

978-0-415-34148-6

£32.99

Hardback

978-0-415-34147-9

£110.00

Paperback

978-0-415-24668-2

£24.99

Hardback

978-0-415-24667-5

£95.00

Hardback

978-0-415-94763-3

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-94764-0

£20.99

Hardback

978-0-415-94769-5

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-94770-1

£22.99

Paperback

978-0-415-33905-6

£21.99

Hardback

978-0-415-33904-9

£84.00

e-Book

978-0-203-44841-0

Hardback

978-0-415-34154-7

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-34155-4

£26.99

e-Book

978-0-203-32423-3

Hardback

978-0-415-94496-0

£105.00

Paperback

978-0-415-94497-7

£25.99

e-Book

978-0-203-64643-4

Hardback

978-0-415-26695-6

£120.00

Paperback

978-0-415-26696-3

£31.99

Paperback

978-0-7487-6676-5

£22.99

e-Book

978-0-203-48739-6

Hardback

978-0-415-14082-9

£105.00

Paperback

978-0-415-14083-6

£22.99

e-Book

978-0-203-48588-0

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

human g e og r ap h y s upp l e me n tary r e ad i n g

Human Geography Supplementary Reading

New

Forthcoming

GeoHumanities

Teaching Secondary Geography as if the Planet Matters

Art, History, Text at the Edge of Place Edited by Michael Dear, University of California, USA, Jim Ketchum, American Association of Geographers, USA, Sarah Luria, College of the Holy Cross in Worcester, USA and Doug Richardson, Association of American Geographers, USA

New

Envisioning Landscapes, Making Worlds Geography and the Humanities Edited by Stephen Daniels, University of Nottingham, UK, Dydia DeLyser, Louisiana State University, USA, J. Nicholas Entrikin, University of Notre Dame, USA and Doug Richardson, Association of American Geographers, USA

There has been a remarkable resurgence in the past decade of intellectual interplay between geography and the humanities in both academic and public circles. Terminology and concepts such as space, place, landscape, mapping and geography are becoming pervasive as conceptual frameworks and core metaphors in recent publications by humanities scholars and well-known writers. Envisioning Landscapes, Making Worlds examines the depth and complexity of human meaning invested in maps, attached to landscapes, and embedded in the spaces and places of modern life. The clashing and blending of cultures caused by globalization and the new technologies that profoundly alter human environmental experience suggest new geographical narratives and representations that are explored here by a multidisciplinary group of authors. With contributions from leadng scholars, this text is essential reading for scholars and students seeking to understand the new synergies and interconnectedness of geography and the humanities. Selected Contents: Part 1: Mapping Part 2: Reflecting Part 3: Representing Part 4: Performing March 2011: 234 x 156: 360pp Hb: 978-0-415-58977-2: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58978-9: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83928-7 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415589789

View any

product

online using the urls below each listing

Geohumanities identifies a convergence of transdisciplinary thought characterized by geography’s engagement with the humanities, and the humanities’ integration of place and the tools of geography into its studies. With this cutting edge book, an international collaboration of scholars, architects, artists, activists, scientists and writers map this emerging intellectual terrain. It explores the creative zone at the edge of the humanities’ rapidly expanding engagement with geography, and the multi-methodological inquiries that analyze the meanings of place, and then reconstruct those meanings to provoke new knowledge as well as the possibility of altered political practices. The book’s contributors address urgent contemporary imperatives, such as the link between creativity and place; altered practices of spatial literacy; the increasing complexity of visual representation in art, culture, and science; and the ubiquitous presence of geospatial technologies in the Information Age. Selected Contents: Part 1: Creative Places Part 2: Spatial Literacies Part 3: Visual Geographies Part 4: Spatial Histories April 2011: 234 x 156: 344pp Hb: 978-0-415-58979-6: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58980-2: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83927-0

John Morgan, Institute of Education, University of London, UK Series: Teaching... as if the Planet Matters

’Teaching Geography as if the Planet Matters provides a timely outline of powerful knowledge and arguments that will be needed to counter a strengthening of current curriculum orthodoxies. Not until school geography undergoes the revolution that this book outlines can it honestly claim to be contributing to more sustainable futures.’ – John Huckle, Visiting Fellow at the University of York and formerly Principal Lecturer in Education at De Montfort University The true worth of a school subject is revealed in how far it can account for and respond to the major issues of the time. The issue of the environment cuts across subject boundaries and requires an interdisciplinary response. Geography teachers are part of that response and they have a crucial role in helping students to respond to environmental issues and representations. Selected Contents: 1. Geography Teaching and the Battle for Ideas 2. From Environmental Geography to Education for Sustainable Development 3. Geography, Society, Nature – Changing Perspectives 4. Inescapable Ecologies? 5. A Question of Food 6. The Nature of Cities 7. Changing Economic Geographies 8. Climate Change, mobile lives and Anthropocene Geographies 9. Teaching Geography as if the Planet Matters: Let’s be Bealistic. References

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415589802

July 2011: 246 x 174: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-56387-1: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56388-8: £21.99

Forthcoming

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415563888

The Routledge Atlas of Central Eurasian Affairs Stanley D. Brunn, University of Kentucky, USA and Stanley Toops, Miami University, USA This Atlas provides concisely written entries on the most important current issues in Central Asia and Eurasia. Offering relevant information on the regions place in the contemporary political and economic worlds, it includes background topics, the position of the region in the world and profiles of the constituent countries, namely Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, and Uzbekistan, and also Mongolia, western China, Tibet, and the three Caucasus states Armenia, Azerbaijan, and Georgia. Each entry comes with timely and significant maps and data. Designed for use in teaching undergraduate and graduate classes and seminars in geography, history, economics, anthropology, international relations, political science and the environment as well as regional courses on the Former Soviet Union, Central Asia, and Eurasia, this book is also a comprehensive reference source for libraries and scholars interested in these fields. Selected Contents: 1. Defining the Region 2. History 3. Population 4. Environmental Bases 5. Economy 6. Energy 7. Culture 8. Politics 9. Cities. November 2011: 246 x 174: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-49750-3: £85.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415497503

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

Participatory Action Research Approaches and Methods Connecting People, Participation and Place Edited by Sara Kindon, Rachel Pain and Mike Kesby Series: Routledge Studies in Human Geography Selected Contents: Part 1: Reflection Part 2: Action Part 3: Reflection 2007: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-40550-8: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-59976-4: £23.50 eBook: 978-0-203-93367-1 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415599764

hu m a n geography supp leme n tary r e adi n g

New

Forthcoming

Geographies of Children, Youth and Families An International Perspective

Entrepreneurship, Innovation and Regional Development

Edited by Louise Holt, Loughborough University, UK

An Introduction

This edited collection brings together international experts from the vibrant and growing field of geographies of children, youth and families.

Jay Mitra, University of Essex, UK

Designed as an introduction to the topic, this book provides an overview of current conceptual and theoretical debates surrounding geographies of children, youth and families, and gives a wide range of examples of cutting-edge research from a variety of national contexts across the globe. The theme of ‘disentangling the socio-spatial contexts of young people and/or their families’ advances debates in the field by emphasising the context of young people’s social agency. Geographies of Children, Youth and Families is an invaluable course text for undergraduate and postgraduate students of geography and the social sciences, as well as being of interest to students and practitioners of education, youth work, social policy, and social work. Selected Contents: Part 1: Bodies and Identities Part 2: The Home, Family and Intergenerational Relationships Part 3: Cities and/or Public Spaces Part 4: Institutional Spaces 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-56383-3: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56384-0: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86330-5

Entrepreneurship, Innovation and Regional Development is unique in that it addresses the central factors in economic development – entrepreneurship, innovation and organizational learning – as regional phenomena. This definitive text focuses on different types of organizations to illustrate the value of entrepreneurship and innovation both for businesses and for regional development. Establishing a firm link between entrepreneurship, innovation and economic regeneration, the book also examines the factors contributing to their success.

Replete with international case studies, empirical evidence of concepts and practical examples, this is an ideal text to support postgraduate teaching and research related to entrepreneurship, innovation management and regional economic development. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Entrepreneurial Opportunity: Conditions and Circumstances for Innovation and New Firm Creation 3. Entrepreneurship Theories: The Economic Arguments 4. The Social Dimensions of Entrepreneurship 5. The Entrepreneurial Organization 6. The Entrepreneurial Environment: Context, Institutions, Constraints and Framework Conditions 7. Entrepreneurship and Learning 8. Entrepreneurship, Internationalization and Globalization: Learning, Innovation and Development in the International Context 9. Higher Education, Universities and Entrepreneurship 10. Entrepreneurship Policy: Its Emergence, Scope and Value 11. Entrepreneurship, Innovation and Economic Development 12. Conclusion: Future Directions and the Romance of Entrepreneurship

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415563840

June 2011: 246 x 174: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-40515-7: £95.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-40516-4: £34.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415405164

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Economic Geography

William P. Anderson

2011

Paperback

978-0-415-70121-1

£33.99

Hardback

978-0-415-70120-4

£90.00

Paperback

978-0-415-99694-5

£20.99

Hardback

978-0-415-99693-8

£95.00

Hardback

978-0-415-47833-5

£78.00

Paperback

978-0-415-47834-2

£22.99

Hardback

978-0-415-46158-0

£85.00

Paperback

978-0-415-46159-7

£25.99

e-Book

978-0-203-87398-4

Operation Gatekeeper and Beyond Tackling Social Exclusion Social Movements and Activism in the USA

Ethnographies Revisited

Transnationalism

Global Perspectives in the Geography Curriculum

Remaking Regional Economies The People’s Property? Place-Based Education in the Global Age

Globalization’s Contradictions Spaces of Social Exclusion

Complimentary Exam Copy

Joseph Nevins John Pierson Stephen Valocchi

Edited by Antony J. Puddephatt, William Shaffir and Steven W. Kleinknecht Steven Vertovec

Alex Standish

Susan Christopherson and Jennifer Clark Lynn Staeheli and Donald Mitchell Edited by David A. Gruenewald and Gregory A. Smith Edited by Dennis Conway and Nik Heynen Jamie Gough, Aram Eisenschitz and Andrew McCulloch

2010 2009 2009

2009

2008

2007 2007 2007

2006 2005

Hardback

978-0-415-45220-5

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-45221-2

£29.99

e-Book

978-0-203-87650-3

Paperback

978-0-415-43299-3

£20.99

Hardback

978-0-415-43298-6

£70.00

e-Book

978-0-203-92708-3

Hardback

978-0-415-46895-4

£90.00

Paperback

978-0-415-47549-5

£24.99

e-Book

978-0-203-89083-7

Hardback

978-0-415-35743-2

e-Book

978-0-203-00348-0

Hardback

978-0-415-95522-5

£99.00

Paperback

978-0-415-95523-2

£25.99

Hardback

978-0-8058-5863-1

£80.00

Paperback

978-0-8058-5864-8

£24.99

e-Book

978-1-4106-1660-9

Paperback

978-0-415-77062-0

£26.99

Hardback

978-0-415-77061-3

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-28089-1

£29.99

Hardback

978-0-415-28088-4

£105.00

£90.00

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

human g e og r ap h y r e s e arc h mon og r a p h s

Human Geography research Monographs

Forthcoming

New

Amazonian Geographies

The Globalization of Advertising

Emerging Identities and Landscapes Edited by Jacqueline M. Vadjunec, Oklahoma State University, USA and Marianne Schmink, University of Florida, USA This book explores the diversity of changing identities and landscapes emerging in different corners of Amazonia. This book was published as a special issue of the Journal of Cultural Geography.

Forthcoming

Teletechnologies, Place and Community

October 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-60053-8: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415600538

Rowan Wilken, University of Melbourne, Australia Series: Comedia The present electronic age is said to have brought profound changes to how we think about and experience who we are, where we are, and how we relate with one another. Place and community have traditionally formed key concepts for thinking about these issues, but what relevance do these concepts now hold for us? This study re-evaluates how ideas of place and community intersect with and help us make sense of a world transformed by information and communication technologies. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Techno-Sociality: Computer-Mediated Communication and Virtual Community 2. The Problem of Community 3. Haunting Affects: Place in Virtual Discourse 4. Machines of Tomorrow Past: Early Experiments in Architectural Computing 5. Fantasies of Transcendence and Transformative Imagination: Architectural Visions of Cyberspace 6. Domesticating Technology, Mobilising Place 7. Rethinking Teletechnologies, Place, and Community July 2011: 229 x 152: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-87595-0: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415875950

Migration, Domestic Work and Affect A Decolonial Approach on Value and the Feminization of Labor Encarnación Gutiérrez-Rodr’guez, University of Manchester, UK Series: Routledge Research in Gender and Society

Drawing upon several years of research in Germany, the UK, Spain, and Austria, and over 100 interviews with Peruvian, Ecuadorian and Chilean women working as domestic and care workers, this book examines hitherto unexplored areas of the interpersonal relationships between domestic and care workers and their employers.

New

Design Economies and the Changing World Economy Innovation, Production and Competitiveness John R. Bryson, University of Birmingham, UK and Grete Rusten, University of Bergen, Norway Series: Routledge Studies in Human Geography Design Economies and the Changing World Economy provides the first comprehensive account of the relationship between innovation, design, corporate competitiveness and place. Design economies are explored through an analysis of corporate strategies, the relationship between product and designer, copying and imitation including nefarious learning, design and competitiveness, and design-centred regional policies. The design process plays a critical role in corporate competitiveness as it functions at the intersection between production and consumption and the interface between consumer behaviour and the development and design of products. This book focuses on firms, individuals, as well as national policy, drawing attention to the development of corporate and nation based design strategies that are intended to enhance competitive advantage. Increasingly products are designed in one location and made in another.

Agencies, Cities and Spaces of Creativity James R. Faulconbridge, University of Lancaster, UK, Peter J. Taylor, Corinne Nativel and Jonathan Beaverstock Series: Routledge Studies in Human Geography The Globalization of Advertising draws upon previously unpublished research to unpack the contemporary structure, spatial organization and city geographies of global advertizing agencies. The book demonstrates how teamwork in contemporary advertizing agencies, intra-organizational power relations and the distribution of organizational capabilities all define how global agencies operate as transnationally integrated organizations. This in turn allows understanding to be developed of the role of the offices of global agencies located in the three case study cities, Detroit, Los Angeles and New York. The role of these three cities as preeminent markets for advertising in the USA is shown to have changed radically over recent years, experiencing both growth and decline in employment as a result of their position in global networks of advertising work; networks that operate in the context of a changing US economy and the rise of new and emerging centres of advertising in Asia and South America. Selected Contents: Part 1: Situating Global Advertising Agencies and Cities 1. Introduction 2. The Global Advertising Agency 3. Cities and the Grounding of Global Advertising Work Part 2: Geographies of Advertising Work in the Twenty First Century 4. Cities and Advertising Globalization: New York, Los Angeles and Detroit in a Global Perspective 5. Agencies and Advertising Globalization: Coordinating Interactions with Clients and Consumers Part 3: Agency – City Relationships in Advertising Globalization 6. New York City: From Centre of Global Advertising to a Global Advertising Centre 7. Los Angeles: A Paradoxically ‘local’ Creative City 8. Detroit: Market Change and A City Falling Outside of the Global Space Economy 9. Coda: Agencies, Cities and Recession 10. Conclusions: Advertising Agencies and Cities in the Space Economy 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-56716-9: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86089-2

Selected Contents: 1. Designer Economies 2. Economies of ‘Design’, Signs and Space: Management, Marketing, Design and Production 3. Nefarious Learning: Imitation versus Inimitability and Differentiation by Design 4. Design Histories: Anonymous Design, Hidden Innovation and Professional Design 5. Corporate Strategy and Designing Competitiveness 6. Design, Corporate Competitiveness and Regional Economic Development 7. Varieties of Capitalism – From Global Production Networks to Production Projects and Distributed Tasks 8. Creating and Shaping Things: Placing and Spacing Product Design 9. Designing Capitalism: Distributed Tasks and Divisions of Expertise and Labour

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415567169

2010: 234 x 156: 264pp Hb: 978-0-415-46175-7: £85.00

Series: Routledge Studies in Human Geography

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415461757

Selected Contents: Introduction: Sensing Domestic Work 1. Decolonizing Migration Studies: On Transcultural Translation 2. Coloniality of Labor: Migration Regimes and the Latin American Diaspora in Europe 3. Governing the Household: On the Underside of Governmentality 4. Biopolitics and Value: Complicating the Feminization of Labor 5. Symbolic Power and Difference: Racializing Inequality 6. Affective Value: Ontologies of Exploitation 7. Decolonial Ethics and the Politics of Affects: Talking Rights 2010: 229 x 152: 234pp Hb: 978-0-415-99473-6: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415994736

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

Rethinking Maps New Frontiers in Cartographic Theory Edited by Martin Dodge, University of Manchester, UK, Rob Kitchin, National University of Ireland, Maynooth and Chris Perkins, University of Manchester, UK Rethinking Maps brings together leading researchers to explore how maps are being rethought, made and used, and what these changes mean. 2009: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-46152-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-67667-0: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87684-8 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415676670

hu m a n geography rese arch mon og r ap h s

Gender and Agrarian Reforms Susie Jacobs, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK Series: Routledge International Studies of Women and Place The redistribution of land has profound implications for women and for gender relations; however, gender issues have been marginalized from both theoretical and policy discussions of agrarian reform. This book presents an overview of gender and agrarian reform experiences globally. Jacobs highlights case studies from Latin America, Asia, Africa and eastern Europe and also compares agrarian and land reforms organised along collective lines as well as along individual household lines. This volume will be of interest to scholars in Geography, Women’s Studies, and Economics. 2009: 229 x 152: 268pp Hb: 978-0-415-37648-8: £70.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415376488

The Spatial, the Legal and the Pragmatics of World-Making Nomospheric Investigations David Delaney, Amherst College, USA Critical legal geography is practised by an increasing number of scholars in various disciplines, but it has not had the benefit of an overarching theoretical framework that might overcome its currently rather ad hoc character. The Spatial, the Legal and the Pragmatics of World-Making remedies this situation. Presenting a balanced convergence of contemporary socio-legal and critical geographic scholarship, David Delaney offers a ground-breaking contribution to the fast growing field of legal geography. Selected Contents: 1. Welcome to the Nomosphere 2. Nomospheric Situations 3. Nomospheric Settings 4. Nomoscapes 5. Nomospheric Projects 6. Nomospheric Techniques 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-46319-5: £75.00

Critical Reflections on Regional Competitiveness

Spaces of Vernacular Creativity

Theory, Policy, Practice

Edited by Tim Edensor, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK, Deborah Leslie, University of Toronto, Canada, Steve Millington, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK and Norma Rantisi, Concordia University, Canada

Gillian Bristow, Cardiff University, UK Series: Routledge Studies in Human Geography The book is structured into three parts. Part one introduces the concept of regional competitiveness by tracing its origins and exploring its different meanings in regional economic development. This will critically engage with political economy approaches to understanding the nature and dominance of the competitiveness discourse. Part two interrogates the pursuit of regional competitiveness in policy and practice. This critically evaluates the degree to which the pursuit of competitiveness is encouraging convergence in policy agendas in regions through an examination of key determinants of policy sameness and difference, notably benchmarking and devolved governance. Part three explores the limitations to regional competitiveness and explores whether and how its predominance in the policy discourse might be challenged by alternative agendas such as sustainable development and wellbeing. This focuses on the developing qualitative character of regional development. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Discourse of Regional Competitiveness Introduction: Neoliberalism and the Regional Competitiveness Hegemony 1. What is Regional Competitiveness? 2. The Political Economy of Regional Competitiveness Part 2: Regional Competitiveness in Policy and Practice 3. Competitiveness and the ‘one-size-fits-all’ Regional Policy Consensus 4. Performance Indicators and Rankings: Deconstructing Competitiveness League Tables 5. Resisting or Re-stating Competitiveness? Variation, Recontextualisation and the Role of the Regional State Part 3: Moving Beyond Competitiveness 6. The Limits to Competitiveness 7. Resilient Regions: Re’place’-ing Regional Competitiveness 2010: 234 x 156: 200pp Hb: 978-0-415-47159-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86540-8 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415471596

Rethinking the Cultural Economy

Series: Routledge Studies in Human Geography This book argues for a rethinking of what constitutes creativity, foregrounding non-economic values and practices, and the often marginal and everyday spaces in which creativity takes shape. 2009: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-48095-6: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88644-1 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415480956

Geographies of the New Economy Critical Reflections Edited by Peter W. Daniels, University of Birmingham, UK, Andrew Leyshon, University of Nottingham, UK, Michael J. Bradshaw, University of Leicester, UK and Jonathan Beaverstock, Loughborough University, UK 2009: 234 x 156: 212pp Pb: 978-0-415-49351-2: £24.95 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415493512

Globalisation and Migration New Issues, New Politics Edited by Ronaldo Munck, Dublin City University, Ireland Series: ThirdWorlds This book was published as a special issue of Third World Quarterly.

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415463195

2009: 246 x 174: 249pp Hb: 978-0-415-46832-9: £85.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415468329

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Beyond Territory

Edited by Harald Bathelt, Maryann Feldman and Dieter F. Kogler

2011

Hardback

978-0-415-49327-7

£80.00

The Spatial Turn

Edited by Barney Warf and Santa Arias

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-77573-1

£90.00

International Migration and Knowledge

Allan Williams and Vladimir Baláž

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-43492-8

£85.00

Time-Space Compression

Barney Warf

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-41803-4

£95.00

e-Book

978-0-203-93805-8

Economic Geography

Edited by Sharmistha Bagchi-Sen and Helen Lawton-Smith

2006

Hardback

978-0-415-36784-4

£95.00

Global Geographies of Post-Socialist Transition

Tassilo Herrschel

2006

Hardback

978-0-415-32149-5

£90.00

Service Industries and Asia Pacific Cities

Edited by Peter W. Daniels, Kong Chong Ho and Tom Hutton

2005

Hardback

978-0-415-32749-7

£85.00

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

h uman g e og r ap hy r e f e r e n c e ur ban s tudi e s te x tbo o k s New

Boys and Their Schooling

human geography Reference

The Experience of Becoming Someone Else John Whelen, Monash University, Australia

Handbook of Local and Regional Development

Series: Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Andy Pike, Newcastle University, UK, Andres Rodriguez-Pose, London School of Economics, UK and John Tomaney, Newcastle University, UK

This book presents an ethnographic study of the experiences of teenage boys in an Australian high school. It follows a group of thirteen- to fifteen-year-olds over a period of more than two years, and seeks to understand why so many boys say they hate school yet enjoy being with one another in their daily confrontations with the formal school. The study acknowledges the ongoing significance of the ’boys’ debate’ to policy-makers and the media, and therefore to teachers and parents, but moves it on from issues of gender construction and the panic about achievement to the broader question of what it is to experience being schooled as a boy in the new liberal educational environment. Selected Contents: Part 1: Boys in the Frame 1. Getting at Experience 2. The Schoolboy as Object of Study 3. Writing the Schoolboy 4. Observing Participation Part 2: That Unstable Construct 5. Monday Morning 6. George 7. Year 9 8. The Student Body 9. The Aspirational Self 10. Conclusion: Another New Beginning. Epilogue. March 2011: 229 x 152: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-87917-0: £70.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415879170

New

Border Spaces and Revolutionary Imaginations Edited by Stuart Aitken, Fernando Bosco, Thomas Herman and Kate Swanson all at San Diego State University, USA Drawing from discussions that pulled together child researchers working near the borders of Mexico, the United States and Canada, the essays in this collection explore how material and metaphoric borders give way to young people’s experimentations with cultural, social and political change. This book was published as a special issue of the Children’s Geographies. Selected Contents: 1. Overturning Assumptions about Young People, Border Spaces and Revolutions Part 1: Borders as Bricolage 2. The Importance of Looking at the Border from a Young Person’s Perspective 3. Listening for Spaces of Ordinariness: Filipino-Canadian Youths’ Transnational Lives 4. Narratives from the Other Side: The Revelations and Dynamics of a Bi-national Pen-pal Program in Border Spaces Part 2: Young People as La Frontera 5. ’Not Bad for a Little Migrant Working Kid’ 6. Glocalists in Tijuana: Youth, Cultural Citizenship and Cosmopolitan Identity 7. Play, Work or Activism? Broadening the Connections Between Political and Children’s Geographies Part 3: Border Spaces and Revolution 8. Border Rootedness as Transformative Resistance: Youth Overcoming Violence and Inspection in a U.S.-Mexico Border Region 9. Youth on the Line and the No Borders Movement 10. Institutional Borders, Revolutionary Imaginings and the Becoming-adult of the Child Hadi 11. ’For Every Border, There is also a Bridge’: Overturning Borders in Young Aboriginal Peoples’ Lives May 2011: 246 x 174: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-61946-2: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415619462

The Handbook of Local and Regional Development provides a comprehensive statement and reference point for local and regional development. The scope of this Handbook’s coverage and contributions engages with and reflects upon the politics and policy of how we think about and practise local and regional development, encouraging dialogue across the disciplinary barriers between notions of ‘local and regional development’ in the Global North and ‘development studies’ in the Global South. With over forty contributions from leading international scholars in the field, this Handbook provides critical reviews and appraisals of current state-of-the-art conceptual and theoretical approaches and future developments in local and regional development. Selected Contents: Section 1: Local and Regional Development in a Global Context Section 2: Defining the Principles and Values of Local and Regional Development Section 3: Concepts and Theories of Local and Regional Development Section 4: Government and Governance Section 5: Local and Regional Development Policy Section 6: Global Perspectives 2010: 246 x 174: 664pp Hb: 978-0-415-54831-1: £130.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415548311

Urban Studies Textbooks 5th Edition

New

City Reader Edited by Richard T. LeGates, San Francisco State University, USA and Frederic Stout, Stanford University, USA Series: Routledge Urban Reader Series The fifth edition of the highly successful The City Reader juxtaposes the best classic and contemporary writings on the city. It contains fifty-seven selections including seventeen new selections by Elijah Anderson, Robert Bruegmann, Michael Dear, Jan Gehl, Harvey Molotch, Clarence Perry, Daphne Spain, Nigel Taylor, Samuel Bass Warner, and others – five of which have been newly written exclusively for The City Reader. Classic writings from Ebenezer Howard, Ernest W. Burgess, LeCorbusier, Lewis Mumford, Jane Jacobs, and Louis Wirth, meet the best contemporary writings of Sir Peter Hall, Manuel Castells, David Harvey, Kenneth Jackson and others. The City Reader has been extensively updated and expanded to reflect the latest thinking in each of the disciplinary areas included and in topical areas such as sustainable urban development, climate change, globalization, and the impact of technology on cities. The plate sections have been extensively revised and expanded and a new plate section on global cities has been added. The anthology features general and section introductions and introductions to the selected articles. New to this edition is a bibliography of 100 top books about cities. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Evolution of Cities Part 2: Urban Culture and Society Part 3: Urban Space Part 4: Urban Politics, Governance and Economics Part 5: Urban Planning History and Visions Part 6: Urban Planning Thoery and Practice Part 7: Perspectives on Urban Design Part 8: Cities in a Global Society January 2011: 246 x 189: 704pp Hb: 978-0-415-55664-4: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55665-1: £31.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86926-0 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415556651

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

u rban st u die s tex tbook s

Forthcoming

5th Edition

2nd Edition

4th Edition

The Urban Sociology Reader

Urban Geography

Urban and Regional Planning

Edited by Jan Lin, Occidental College, USA and Christopher Mele, State University of New York at Buffalo, USA

Tim Hall, University of Gloucestershire, UK and Heather Barrett, University of Worcester, UK

Peter Hall and Mark Tewdwr-Jones both at University College London, UK

Series: Routledge Contemporary Human Geography Series

Series: Routledge Urban Reader Series The urban world is a provocative terrain on which to contemplate the central institutions, structures and problems of the social world and how they have transformed over the last 200 years. This Reader traverses this terrain through sections on urban social theory, social difference in the city, culture in everyday life, culture and the urban economy, globalization and the world system and urban social movements. Drawing together seminal selections covering the nineteenth to the twenty-first centuries, this Reader includes forty significant writings from eminent names such as Simmel, Wirth, Park, Burgess, Zukin, Sassen, Smith and Castells. Selections are predominantly sociological, but some readings cross disciplinary boundaries. Providing an essential resource for students of urban studies, this book brings together important but, till now, widely dispersed writings. Editorial commentaries precede each entry; introducing the text, demonstrating its significance, and outlining the issues surrounding its topic, whilst the associated bibliography enables deeper investigations. November 2011: 246 x 189: 442pp Hb: 978-0-415-66530-8: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-66531-5: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415665315

3rd Edition

Urban Geography A Global Perspective Michael Pacione, University of Strathclyde, UK

This is the most comprehensive and readable book on urban geography in the array of contemporary literature on the subject.

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Study of Urban Geography Part 2: An Urbanising World Part 3: Urban Structure and Land Use in the Western City Part 4: Living in the City: Economy, Society and Politics in the Western City Part 5: Urban Geography in the Third World 2009: 246 x 189: 736pp Hb: 978-0-415-46201-3: £115.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46202-0: £33.99 eBook: 978-0-203-88192-7

More than simply examining the new geographical patterns forming within and between cities, this fourth edition of Urban Geography also investigates the way geographers have sought to make sense of this urban transformation. The text critically synthesizes key literatures in the following areas: • the urban world

• urban form and structure • economy and the city • urban politics • planning, regeneration and urban policy • cities and culture • architecture and urban landscapes • images of the city • experiencing the city • housing and residential segregation • transport and mobility in cities • sustainability and the city.

This is the fifth edition of the classic text for students of urban and regional planning. It gives an historical overview of the developments and changes in the theory and practice of planning, throughout the entire twentieth century. This extensively revised edition follows the successful format of previous editions. • It introduces the establishment of planning as part of the public health reforms of the late nineteenth century and goes on to look at the insights of the great figures who influenced the early planning movement, leading up to the creation of the post-war planning machine.

• National and regional planning, and planning for cities and city regions, in the UK, from 1945 to 2010, is then considered. Specific reference is made to the most important British developments in recent times, including the Single Regeneration Budget, English Partnerships, the devolution of Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland, the establishment of the Mayor of London and the dominant urban sustainability paradigm. • Planning in Western Europe, since 1945, is now incorporated new material on EU-wide issues, as well as updated country specific sections.

Tim Hall and Heather Barrett’s extensively revised fourth edition combines the topicality and accessibility of previous editions with new material extending its range of coverage across the field. It features enhanced pedagogy including boxed case studies and discussion points, end of chapter essay and project questions, annotated reading lists and a range of new illustrations and tables. An important volume, written in an engaging, student friendly style, this is an essential read for students and scholars of urban geography.

• Planning in the United States, since 1945, discussed the continuing trends of urban dispersal and social polarization, as well as initiatives in land use planning and transportation policies.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Contexts 1. An Urban World: Overview and Key Questions 2. Changing Approaches 3. Urban Form and Structure Section 2: Themes 4. Economy and the City 5. Politics and Urban Governance 6. Planning, Regeneration and Urban Policy 7. Urban Culture and Society Section 3: Issues 8. Architecture and Urban Landscapes 9. City Image 10. Experiencing the City 11. Housing and Residential Mobility 12. Transport and Mobility in Cities 13. Sustainability in the City

Selected Contents: 1. Planning, Planners and Plans 2. The Origins: The Urban Growth, From 1800 to 1940 3. The Seers: Pioneer Thinkers in Urban Planning, From 1880 to 1945 4. The Creation of the Postwar Planning Machine, From 1940 to 1952 5. National/Regional Planning, From 1945 to 2010 6. Planning for Cities and City Regions, From 1945 to 2010 7. Planning in Western Europe Since 1945 8. Planning in the United States Since 1945 9. The Planning Process

October 2011: 234 x 156: 252pp Hb: 978-0-415-49231-7: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49232-4: £21.99

2010: 246 x 174: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-56652-0: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56654-4: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86142-4

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415492324

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415566544

• Finally the book looks at the nature of the planning process at the start of the twenty-first century, reflecting briefly on shifts in planning paradigms since the 1960s and going on to discuss the main issues of the 1990s and 2000s, including sustainability and social exclusion and looking forward to the twenty-first century.

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415462020

Full Table of Contents For full table of contents on all titles featured in this catalog, visit: www.routledge.com/geography

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

ur ban s tudi e s te x tbo o k s

The American Urban Reader

Spatial Planning and Climate Change

Forthcoming

History and Theory

Elizabeth Wilson and Jake Piper both at Oxford Brookes University, UK

Method in Urban Design

Edited by Steven H. Corey and Lisa Krissoff Boehm both at Worcester State College, USA

Understanding Cities

Series: Natural and Built Environment Series

Alexander Cuthbert, the University of New South Wales, Australia

The American Urban Reader brings together the most exciting work on the evolution of the American city, from colonial settlement and western expansion to post-industrial cities and the growth of the suburbs. Each of the chronologically and thematically organized chapters includes thoughtfully selected scholarly essays from historians, social scientists and journalists, which are supplemented by relevant primary documents that offer more nuanced perspectives and convey the diversity and interdisciplinary nature of the study of the urban condition. A comprehensive companion website offers valuable further reading, compelling supplementary links, slideshows of additional images, and a dialogue opening blog written by one of the authors.

Steven H. Corey and Lisa Krissoff Boehm together bring thirty-five years of classroom experience in urban studies and history, and have selected a range of work that is dynamically written and carefully edited to be accessible to students and appropriate for anyone seeking a deeper understanding of how American cities have developed.

• a review of policy and legislation at international, EU and UK levels in regard to climate change, and the support this gives to the planning system

For additional information and classroom resources please visit The American Urban Reader companion website at www.routledge.com/textbooks/9780415803984.

• ways to help new and existing urban developments to reduce energy use and to adapt to climate change.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Definitions and Perspectives Part 2: Urban Roots: Colonial Settlement and Westward Expansion Part 3: The New City: Industry and Immigrants, 1820s-1920s Part 4: City Life From the Bottom Up, 1860s-1940s Part 5: Managing the Metropolis Part 6: The Urban Environment Part 7: Transportation and Physical Mobility Part 8: Urban Migrations and Social Mobility Part 9: Race and the Post-War Metropolis Part 10: Exurbia and Postindustrial Cities 2010: 254 x 178: 1140pp Hb: 978-0-415-80394-6: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-80398-4: £39.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415803984

3rd Edition

Planning in the USA Policies, Issues and Processes J. Barry Cullingworth and Roger Caves

This extensively revised edition of Planning in the USA continues to provide a comprehensive introduction to the policies and practices of planning. Discussing land use, urban planning and environmental protection policies, this fully illustrated book explains the nature of the planning process.

Spatial planning has a vital role to play in the move to a low carbon energy future and in adapting to climate change. To do this, spatial planning must develop and implement new approaches.

Elizabeth Wilson and Jake Piper explore a wide range of issues in this comprehensive book on the relationship between our changing climate and spatial planning, and suggest ways of addressing the challenges by taking a longer-sighted approach to our preparation for the future. This text includes: • an overview of what we know already about future climate change and its impacts • the role of spatial planning in relation to climate change

• case studies detailing what responses the UK and the Netherlands have made so far in light of the evidence

Understanding Cities is richly textured, complex and challenging. It creates the vital link between urban design theory and praxis and opens the required methodological gateway to a new and unified field of urban design. For too long urban design has been viewed as a satellite of architecture and urban planning, occupying a ‘no man’s land’ which has prevented its rightful independence. Alexander Cuthbert sets out to challenge this assumption. Using spatial political economy as his most important reference point, Cuthbert both interrogates and challenges mainstream urban design and provides an alternative and viable comprehensive framework for a new synthesis. By implication, this critique ranges across all the environmental disciplines which are undeniably involved in the intellectual debate which this process of reconstruction entails. Building on both his previous books Designing Cities and The Form of Cities, the trilogy allows a new field of urban design to emerge. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Theory/Heterology 2. History 3. Philosophy 4. Politics 5. Culture 6. Gender 7. Environment 8. Aesthetics 9. Typologies 10. Pragmatics. Postscript

The authors take an evidence-based look at this hugely important topic, providing a well-illustrated text for spatial planning professionals, politicians and the interested public, as well as a useful reference for postgraduate planning, geography, urban studies, urban design and environmental studies students.

June 2011: 246 x 174: 328pp Hb: 978-0-415-60823-7: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-60824-4: £24.99

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. Spatial Planning, Climate Change and Sustainable Development 2. Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation: Impacts and Opportunities 3. International, European and National Policy Frameworks Part 2: Perspectives 4. Discourses of Climate Change and Spatial Planning 5. Multi-Scalar Spatial Planning for Climate Change 6. Just Transitions: Horizons, Time-Scales and Equity 7. Environmental Impact Assessment for Climate Change in Spatial Planning Part 3: Spatial Planning in Practice 8. Strategic Planning for Low-Carbon and Resilient Development Pattern 9. Climate Change and the Built Environment 10. Planning for Water Resources under Climate Change 11. Planning for Climate Change: Flood Risk and Marine and Coastal Areas 12. Planning for Biodiversity under Climate Change Part 4: Prospects 13. Climate Change Learning, Knowledge and Communication amongst Spatial Planning Communities 14. Integrating Mitigation and Adaptation for Sustainable Development

European Spatial Planning and Territorial Cooperation

2010: 234 x 156: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-49590-5: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49591-2: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415495912

2008: 246 x 189: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-77420-8: £110.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77421-5: £37.00 eBook: 978-0-203-89094-3 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415774215

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415608244

Stefanie Dühr, Radboud University, the Netherlands, Claire Colomb, University College London, UK and Vincent Nadin, Delft Technical University, the Netherlands

Planners in the EU are now routinely engaged in cooperation across national borders to share and devise effective ways of intervening in the way our cities, towns and rural areas develop. In short, the EU has become an important framework for planning practice, research and teaching. Spatial planning in Europe is being ‘Europeanized’, with corresponding changes for the role of planners.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introducing The European Dimension of Spatial Planning Part 2: The Spatial Development Context for European Spatial Planning Part 3: The Institutional Framework for European Union Spatial Policy Making Part 4: The European Spatial Planning Agenda Part 5: EU Spatial Policy: Sectoral Policies and their Territorial Effects Part 6: Towards New Forms of Territorial Governance? 2010: 246 x 174: 488pp Hb: 978-0-415-46773-5: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46774-2: £34.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415467742

u rban st u die s tex tbook s

Urban Regeneration in the UK Andrew Tallon, University of the West of England, UK

Urban Regeneration Management analyzes the regeneration management process, locating the issues within both local and international perspectives, critiquing the theoretical literature on globalization, and analyzing a variety of case studies from across the globe.

Selected Contents: Section 1: The Context for Urban Regeneration Section 2: Central Government Urban Regeneration Policy Section 3: Cities in Transition: Themes and Approaches Section 4: Conclusion 2009: 246 x 174: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-42596-4: £99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42597-1: £28.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87259-8 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415425971

Forthcoming

New

Events and Urban Regeneration

City Design

Andrew Smith, Westminster University, UK Events and Urban Regeneration analyzes varying theoretical perspectives to provide insight into why major events are important to contemporary cites. It examines the different ways in which events can assist regeneration, by reviewing good practice as well as problems and issues associated with this unconventional form of public policy. It identifies key issues faced by those tasked with using events to assist regeneration and suggests how practices could be improved in the future. The book adopts a multi-disciplinary perspective, drawing together ideas from the geography, urban planning and tourism literatures, as well as from the emerging events and regeneration fields. It illustrates arguments with a range of international case studies placed within and at the end of each chapter, to show positive outcomes that have been achieved and examples of high profile failures. This timely book is essential reading for students and practitioners who are interested in events, urban planning, urban geography and tourism. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Understanding Events 2. Event Theories: The Conceptual Basis for Regeneration Effects 3. The Emergence of Events as Public Policy Part 2: Different Ways Events can be Used to Assist Regeneration 4. Event Venues and Urban Regeneration 5. Events and Wider Urban Regeneration 6. Event-themed Versus Event-Led Regeneration 7. Events and Place Image 8. Events and Tourism Development Part 3: Contemporary Issues 9. Event Bidding and Inter-city Competition to Stage Events 10. Events Strategy: Developing Effective Event Portfolios 11. Conclusions November 2011: 234 x 156: 306pp Hb: 978-0-415-58147-9: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58148-6: £26.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415581486

backlist

Modernist, Traditional, Green and Systems Perspectives Jonathan Barnett, University of Pennsylvania, USA

City Design describes the history and current practice of the four most widely accepted approaches to city design: the Modernist city of towers and highways that, beginning in the 1920s, has come to dominate urban development worldwide but is criticized as mechanical and soul-less; the Traditional organization of cities as streets and public places, scorned by the modernists, but being revived today for its human scale; Green city design, whose history can be traced back thousands of years in Asia, but is becoming increasingly important everywhere as sustainability and the preservation of the planet are recognized as basic issues, and finally Systems city design, which includes infrastructure and development regulation but also includes computer aided techniques which give designers new tools for managing the complexity of cities. Jonathan Barnett writes authoritatively but accessibly about complicated issues of theory and practice, and his approach is objective and inclusive. This is a comprehensive text on city design ideal for planners, landscape architects, urban designers and those who want to understand how to improve cities. Selected Contents: Introduction: Three City Design Challenges 1. Modernist City Design 2. Traditional City Design and the Modern City 3. Green City Design and Climate Change 4. Systems City Design. Conclusion: The Fifth Way January 2011: 246 x 189: 248pp Hb: 978-0-415-77540-3: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77541-0: £31.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415775410

Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Environment and the City

Peter Roberts, Joe Ravetz and Clive George

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-30246-3

£84.00

Paperback

978-0-415-30247-0

£26.99

Hardback

978-0-415-36573-4

£89.00

Paperback

978-0-415-36574-1

£24.99

e-Book

978-0-203-01827-9

Hardback

978-0-415-35442-4

£89.00

Paperback

978-0-415-35443-1

£24.99

e-Book

978-0-203-00109-7

Hardback

978-0-415-33386-3

£110.00

Paperback

978-0-415-33387-0

£32.99

Hardback

978-0-203-39225-6

£68.00

Paperback

978-0-415-33099-2

£21.99

e-Book

978-0-415-33100-5

Hardback

978-0-415-94593-6

£105.00

Paperback

978-0-415-94594-3

£40.00

Paperback

978-0-415-32345-1

£32.99

Hardback

978-0-415-32344-4

£120.00

Paperback

978-0-415-32343-7

£32.99

Hardback

978-0-415-32342-0

£105.00

Hardback

978-0-415-24591-3

£120.00

Paperback

978-0-415-24592-0

£30.99

Hardback

978-0-415-32097-9

£95.00

e-Book

978-0-203-01519-3

Cities and Economies

Cities and Cultures

The Urban Design Reader City

The Suburb Reader The Global Cities Reader The Urban Sociology Reader Urban Theory and the Urban Experience Urban World/Global City

Complimentary Exam Copy

Yeong-Hyun Kim and John Rennie Short

Malcolm Miles

Edited by Michael Larice and Elizabeth Macdonald Phil Hubbard

Edited by Becky Nicolaides and Andrew Wiese Edited by Neil Brenner and Roger Keil Edited by Jan Lin and Christopher Mele Simon Parker David Clark

2007

2006 2006

2006 2005 2005 2003 2003

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

ur ban s tudi e s te x tbo o k s

The Urban and Regional Planning Reader

Cities and Suburbs

Edited by Eugenie L. Birch

Bernadette Hanlon and John Rennie Short both at University of Maryland Baltimore County, USA and Thomas J. Vicino, Northeastern University, USA

Series: Routledge Urban Reader Series

This book draws together the very best of classic and contemporary writings to illuminate the planning of cities and metropolitan areas. The Reader lays out the context, range of concerns, history, methods and key topics for twenty-first century urban and regional planning.

2008: 246 x 189: 496pp Hb: 978-0-415-31997-3: £99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-31998-0: £32.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415319980

2nd Edition

Sustainable Urban Development Reader Edited by Stephen M. Wheeler and Timothy Beatley Series: Routledge Urban Reader Series

Routledge Critical Introductions to Urbanism and the City

New Metropolitan Realities in the US

This book examines the changing nature of metropolitan areas through a comprehensive analysis of the historical, demographic, geographic, economic, and political issues facing the US in the twenty-first century.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The New Metropolitan Landscape Part 1: The Rise of Metropolis 2. The Rise of the City 3. The Rise of the Suburban Metropolis 4. The New Metropolis Part 2: Metropolitan Complexity 5. The New Metropolitan Model 6. Portraits of Metropolitan Diversity 7. The Rise of Immigrant Suburbs Part 3: Suburban Gothic 8. Suburban Gothic 9. Suburbs in Crisis Part 4: Public Policies 10. Metropolitan Public Policy 11. Growth Management and Environmental Sustainability Part 5: Conclusion 12. Prospects and Trajectories 2009: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-49730-5: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49731-2: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87776-0 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415497312

The second edition of the Sustainable Urban Development Reader expands its selection of classic material on sustainable community development. It begins by tracing the roots of the sustainable development concept in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, before presenting classic readings on a number of dimensions of the sustainability concept.

Topics covered include land use and urban design, transportation, ecological planning and restoration, energy and materials use, economic development, social and environmental justice, and green architecture and building. All sections have a concise editorial introduction that places the selection in context and suggests further reading. Additional sections cover tools for sustainable development, sustainable development internationally, visions of sustainable community and case studies from around the world. The book also includes educational exercises for individuals, university classes, or community groups, and an extensive list of recommended readings. Selected Contents: Part 1: Origins of the Sustainability Concept Part 2: Dimensions of Sustainable Urban Development Part 3: Tools for Sustainability Planning Part 4: Sustainable Urban Development Internationally Part 5: Visions of Sustainable Community Part 6: Case Studies of Urban Sustainability Part 7: Sustainability Planning Exercises 2008: 246 x 189: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-45381-3: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45382-0: £32.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415453820

Edited by Malcolm Miles and John Rennie Short This series is designed to allow undergraduate readers to make sense of, and find a critical way into, urbanism. It covers social, political, economic, cultural and spatial concerns.

Cities, Politics and Power Simon Parker, University of York, UK

Cities, Politics and Power begins, with a short introduction outlining the argument and organization of the text. It then charts the development of the urban polity and considers the ways in which coercion and force continue to be used to segregate, oppress and annihilate urban populations. The key collective actors and processes that compete for and organize political power within cities, are critically examined, along with, how urban governance operates and interacts with lesser and greater scales of government and networks of power. Penultimately the text explores the ways in which ‘the political’ is constituted by urban inhabitants, and how social identity, information and communication networks, and the natural and built environment all comprise intersecting fields of urban power. The conclusion calls for a broader theoretical and thematic approach to the study of urban politics in order to reflect more fully the global transformation of political, economic and cultural space resulting from the urbanization of the world’s population.

Selected Contents: Part 1 Part 2: The Political Life of Cities Part 3: Urban Governance Part 4: Identity, Communication and Space Part 5: Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-36579-6: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-36580-2: £21.99 eBook: 978-0-203-01828-6 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415365802

Cities and Nature Lisa Benton-Short and John Rennie Short 2007: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-35588-9: £89.00 Pb: 978-0-415-35589-6: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-00232-2 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415355896

Cities and Cinema Barbara Mennel 2008: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-36445-4: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-36446-1: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-01560-5 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415364461

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

u rban st u die s tex tbook s

Forthcoming

Cities and Design

Cities and Sexualities

Paul L. Knox, Virginia Tech, USA

Phil Hubbard, University of Kent, UK

This book explores the role of the city in shaping our sexual lives. At the same time, it describes how the sexual fears and fantasies of urban designers, planners and governors produce particular types of cities in which some sexual proclivities and tastes are catered for but others excluded. This book accordingly considers the symbiotic relationship between sexuality and the city through case studies of the spaces of courtship , coupling and cohabitation, sites of adult entertainment, prostitution, and pornography, as well as radical and queer spaces of public sex, perversion and pride. Selected Contents: 1. Introducing Cities and Sexualties 2. Sex in the City 3. The Moral Geographies of the City 4. Domesticating Sex 5. On the Town 6. Public Sex 7. Consuming Sex 8. World Cities of Sex 9. Conclusions September 2011: 234 x 156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-56645-2: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56647-6: £23.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86149-3 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415566476

Forthcoming

Cities and Design explores the complex relationships between design and urban environments. It traces the intellectual roots of urban design, presents a critical appraisal of the imprint and effectiveness of design professions in shaping urban environments, examines the role of design in the material culture of contemporary cities, and explores the complex linkages among designers, producers and distributors in contemporary cities: for example fashion and graphic design in New York; architecture, fashion and publishing in London; furniture, industrial design, interior design and fashion in Milan; haute couture in Paris; and so on. This book offers a distinctive social science perspective on the economic and cultural context of design in contemporary cities, presenting cities themselves as settings for design, design services and the ‘affect’ associated with design. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. Cities, Design and Urban Life 2. Design, Designers and the Resurgent Metropolis Part 2: The Intentional City 3. Better by Design? Historical Antecedents 4. The City Redesigned: Modernity, Effeciency and Equity 5. Design for New Sensibilities Part 3: Designer Cities 6. Design and Affect in Urban Spaces 7. Design Services and The City 8. Conclusion: Towards Liveability and Sustainability

Children, Youth and the City

2010: 234 x 156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-49288-1: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49289-8: £24.99

Kathrin Horschelmann, University of Durham, UK and Lorraine van Blerk, University of Dundee

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415492898

This book provides a vivid picture of children and youths in the city, how they make sense of it and how they appropriate it through their social actions. Considering the causes and forms of social inequalities in relation to class, gender, ethnicity, sexuality, ability and geographical location, it discusses specific issues such as poverty, homelessness and work. Each chapter draws on examples and cases from both the developed and developing world, The authors contrast experiences of growing up in the city; focus on urban youth culture, consumption and globalization, and consider contemporary movements towards the role of children and youths in planning processes. This informative book, though dealing with complex theoretical arguments, relates key ideas to this topical subject in a clear and coherent manner, making this book an excellent resource for students of human geography, urban studies and childhood studies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Theorising and Researching Children and Youth in the City 3. The Causes of Effects of Social Inequalities on Children and Youth in the City 4. Growing up in the City: How Children and Youth Experience Urban Space 5. Globalisation and Urban Youth Culture 6. Participation and Active Citizenship in the City 7. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 236pp Hb: 978-0-415-37693-8: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-37692-1: £20.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415376921

Complimentary Exam Copy

Cities and Gender Helen Jarvis, Newcastle University, UK Jonathan Cloke, Loughborough University, UK and Paula Kantor, Director of the Afghanistan Research and Evaluation Unit, Afghanistan

Men and women experience the city differently in a myriad of ways. An analysis of urban and gender studies, as co-constitutive subjects, is long overdue. This book is a systematic treatment of urban and gender studies combined. It presents both a feminist critique of mainstream urban policy and planning, plus a gendered reorientation of key urban social, environmental and city-regional debates.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Approaching the City 1. From Binaries to Intersections 2. Historical Trends in Cities and Urban Studies 3. Trends in Urban Restructuring, Gender and Feminist Theory 4. Scale, Power and Interdependence Part 2: Gender and the Built Environment 5. Infrastructures of Daily Life 6. Migration, Movement and Mobility 7. Homes, Jobs, Communities and Networks Part 3: Representation and Regulation 8. Planning and Social Welfare 9. Urban Poverty, Livelihood and Vulnerability 10. Cities and Gender - Politics in Practice

Urban Studies Supplementary Reading Forthcoming

Urban Theory Beyond the West A World of Cities Edited by Tim Edensor, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK and Mark Jayne, University of Manchester, UK Since the late eighteenth century academic engagement with political, economic, social, cultural, and spatial changes in our cities has been dominated by theoretical frameworks crafted with reference to just a small number of cities in the ‘global North’. This volume seeks to redress that balance and focuses on theoretical engagements with cities beyond ‘the West’. Selected Contents: Part 1: De-centering Urban Theory Part 2: Political Economy Part 3: Political Ecology Part 4: Planning, Form, Structure and Function Part 5: Urban Culture and Everyday Life August 2011: 234 x 156: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-58975-8: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58976-5: £26.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415589765

Disrupted Cities When Infrastructure Fails Edited by Stephen Graham, Newcastle University, UK

Bringing together leading researchers from geography, political science, sociology, public policy and technology studies, Disrupted Cities exposes the politics of well-known disruptions such as devastation of New Orleans in 2005, the global SARS outbreak in 2002-3, and the great power collapse in the North Eastern US in 2003. But the book also excavates the politics of more hidden disruptions: the clogging of city sewers with fat; the day-to-day infrastructural collapses which dominate urban life in much of the global south; the deliberate devastation of urban infrastructure by state militaries; and the ways in which alleged threats of infrastructural disruption have been used to radically reorganize cities as part of the ‘war on terror’. 2009: 235 x 187: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-99178-0: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99179-7: £28.99 eBook: 978-0-203-89448-4 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415991797

2009: 234 x 156: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-41569-9: £89.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41570-5: £22.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87806-4 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415415705

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

ur ban s tudi e s s upp l e me n tary r e ad i n g

2nd Edition

New

The Restless City

Smartcities and Eco-Warriors

The EcoEdge

CJ Lim and Ed Liu both at Bartlett School of Planning, University College London, UK

A Short History of New York from Colonial Times to the Present Joanne Reitano, LaGuardia Community College, City University of New York, USA

The Restless City is a short, lively history of the world’s most exciting and diverse metropolis. It shows how New York’s perpetual struggles for power, wealth, and status exemplify the vigor, creativity, resilience, and influence of the nation’s premier urban center.

The second edition includes nineteen images and brings the story right up through the mayoral election of 2009. In these pages are the stories of a broad cross-section of people and events that shaped the city, including mayors and moguls, women and workers, and policemen and poets. Joanne Reitano shows how New York has invigorated the American dream by confronting the fundamental economic, political, and social challenges that face every city. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. City of The Whirlpool: 1626-1799 3. Gotham: The Paradoxes of the Early National and Jacksonian City: 1800-1840 4. The Proud and Passionate City: 1840-1865 5. The Empire City: 1865-1899: Questioning the Gilded Age 6. The City of Ambition: Progressivism on Trial, 1900-1919 7. The Big Apple: Pursuing the Dream, 1920-1945 8. World City: Redefining Gotham, 1945-1969 9. The Big Apple Redux: Leadership Under Fire, 1970-1993 10. A New New York, 1994-2009 2010: 235 x 156: 360pp Hb: 978-0-415-88013-8: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-88014-5: £19.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415880145

The Restless City Reader A New York City Sourcebook Edited by Joanne Reitano, LaGuardia Community College, City University of New York, USA

From Peter Stuyvesant to Mayor Bloomberg, New York City’s history is full of vibrant characters, riveting events, and fascinating controversies that reflect shifting economic, political, social, and cultural currents within New York’s long history. The Restless City Reader sourcebook uses primary and secondary sources from a variety of perspectives to illuminate the issues that have affected the city and its people. The Restless City Reader can be used alone or with The Restless City, a short narrative history of New York from colonial times to the present. With a helpful introduction and document head notes, as well as study questions and suggestions for further inquiry, The Restless City Reader is a short, engaging, usable collection of sources for students, professors, and anyone interested in the city – its dreams, its challenges, its voices. 2010: 235 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-80227-7: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-80228-4: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415802284

Urgent Design Challenges in Building Sustainable Cities Edited by Esther Charlesworth, RMIT University, Melbourne, Australia and Rob Adams, Director of Design and Urban Environment, City of Melbourne, Australia

Presenting diverse case studies of contemporary sustainable urban practice from Europe, Africa, India, South America, the USA and Australia, this book offers the reader a fantastic wealth of practical material from a range of internationally renowned authors.

Each practical case study has addressed issues and then offered solutions to implement sustainable cities across a range of urban scales and cultures. Urgent design challenges explored include population density, recreating infrastructure that supports carbon neutral or low carbon (emission) intensive urban activities, and retrofitting for sustainability. Highly illustrated, thematically focused and with superb global coverage, this book presents a multi-voiced and yet highly cohesive reference for anyone interested in green issues in urban design and architecture. Selected Contents: Abbreviations. Acknowledgements 1. The EcoEdge Part 1: Urban Design and a Sustainable City 2. Overview 3. Air in the City: The Place of Work 4. Assassination in the Sustainable City:The Netherlands and Beyond 5. Reprogramming the Cities for Increased Populations and Climate Change 6. Sustainability for Survival: Moving the United Kingdom beyond the Zero Carbon Agenda 7. Chaos and Resillience: The Johannesburg Experience Part 2: Infrastructure and a Sustainable City 8. Overview 9. Sustainable Drinking Water and Sanitation: Two Indian Cases 10. Sustainable Savannah in Georgia 11. Ecopolis: Small Steps Towards Urbanism as a Living System 12. The Greed Edge: China Between Hope and Hazard Part 3: Architecture and Sustainable City 13. Overview 14. A Landscape Framework for Urban Sustainability: Thu Thiem, Ho Chi Minh City 15. Networks Cities in China: Sustaining Culture, Economics and the Environment 16. The Responsive City: London South Bank Experiences 17. Small-Scale Sustainability: Parasite Las Palmas and Beyond 18. Sustainable and Sub-tropical City: An Architetcure of Timberframed Landscapes 19. Beyond the EcoEdge February 2011: 246 x 189: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-57247-7: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57248-4: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415572484

Modern methods of agriculture have led to cities growing out of control and reducing the available agricultural land, threatening the sustainability of our food system. The previous mutually sustaining relationships of animals, humans and the land have been lost with the progress of industry.

The Smartcity, an ecological symbiosis between nature, society and the built form is the innovative response to contemporary problems from one of the world’s leading urban design and architectural thinkers. Addressing the problems of unchecked city growth, the idea of the Smartcity questions whether we could begin to live once again from first principles, focusing in on the inhabitants of the city. The holistic construct of the Smartcity is developed through a series of international case studies, some commissioned by government organisations, others speculative and polemic. Reframing the way people think about urban green space and the evolution of cities, CJ Lim and Ed Liu explore how the reintegration of agriculture in urban environments can cultivate new spatial practices and social cohesion in addition to food for our tables. Selected Contents: Preface. Urban Utopias and the Smartcity Six Manifestos for the Smartcity. From Soil to Table. The Perpetual Motion Machine. The American Dream Redux . Rise of the Eco-Warrior. Scenic Positions. Cultivating Community. Excavating The Concrete Jungle: A Pictorial Essay. 1. Urban Agriculture: Guangming Smartcity China A Lexicon Of The Smartcity Neology 2. Urban Agriculture: Daejeon Urban Renaissance Masterplan Korea 3. Urban Agriculture: Central Open Space: MAC Korea 4. Urban Agriculture: Nordhavnen Smartcity Denmark 5. Urban Agriculture: Tomato Exchange UK 6. Urban Agriculture: Dongyi Wan East Waterfront China 7. Urban Agriculture: Dusable Park USA 8. Eco-Sustainability: Guangming Energy Park China 9. Eco-Sustainability: Nanyui Urban Living Room China 10. Cultivating Communities: Redcar Seafront Development UK 11. Cultivating Communities: Nanyui Urban Living Room China 12. Cultivating Communities: Newark Gateway Project USA. Sitopia – The Urban Future Carolyn Steel. The Role of Cities in Climate Change David Satterthwaite. Post-Sustainability Mark Jarzombek. Index 2010: 276 x 219: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-57122-7: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57124-1: £29.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85032-9 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415571241

Distributed Urbanism Cities After Google Earth Edited by Gretchen Wilkins, RMIT University, School of Architecture and Design, Australia Exploring the increasingly decentralized systems through which cities are organized and produced, Distributed Urbanism highlights the architectural practices that are emerging in response. Unlike early models of urbanism, in which centralized models of production, communication and governance were sited within a central business district, contemporary urbanism is shaped by remote, distributed mechanisms such as information technologies, (i.e. SatNav, Google Earth, E-trade, Photosynth or RSS web feeds) cooperative economic models and environmental networks, many of which are physically remote from the cities they shape. Selected Contents: Foreword. Acknowledgements. Introduction 1. The City You Can’t See on Google Earth 2. Rural Urbanism: Thriving Under the Radar – Beijing’s Villages in the City 3. Rotterdam 1979-2007: From Ideology to Market Communism and Beyond 4. MegaHouse 5. Borderland/Borderama/Detroit 6. Rubble in the Sand 7. Density of Emptiness 8. Antisepsis 9. Beyond Urbanism: Mumbai and the Cultivation of an Eye 10. Resurrecting Cities: Instant Urban Planning 11. Productive Residue: The Casting of Alternative Public Space 12. Bubble Cities: Airports, Islands and Nomads Bibliography. Index 2010: 246 x 174: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-56231-7: £95.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-56232-4: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415562324

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

u rban st u die s supp leme n tary r e adi n g

new

The Exposed City

Insurgent Public Space

Sunburnt Cities

Mapping the Urban Invisibles

The Great Recession, Depopulation and Urban Planning in the American Sunbelt

Nadia Amoroso, University of Toronto, Canada

Guerrilla Urbanism and the Remaking of Contemporary Cities

Edited by Jeffrey Hou, University of Washington, USA

There is a vast amount of information about a city which is invisible to the human eye – crime levels, transportation patterns, cell phone use and air quality to name just a few. If a city was able to be defined by these characteristics, what form would it take? How could it be mapped?

Justin B. Hollander, Tufts University, USA

In recent years there has been a growing focus on urban and environmental studies, and the skills and techniques needed to address the wider challenges of how to create sustainable communities. Central to that demand is the increasing urgency of addressing the issue of urban decline, and the response has almost always been to pursue growth policies to attempt to reverse that decline. The track record of growth policies has been mixed at best. Until the first decade of the twenty-first century decline was assumed to be an issue only for former industrial cities – the so-called Rust Belt. But the sudden reversal in growth in the major cities of the American Sunbelt has shown that urban decline can be a much wider issue. Justin Hollander’s research into urban decline in both the Sun and Rust Belts draws lessons planners and policy makers that can be applied universally.

Hollander addresses the reasons and statistics behind these ’shrinking cities’ with a positive outlook, arguing that growth for growth’s sake is not beneficial for communities, suggesting instead that urban development could be achieved through shrinkage. Case studies on Phoenix, Flint, Orlando and Fresno support the argument, and Hollander delves into the numbers, literature and individual lives affected and how they have changed in response to the declining regions. Written for urban scholars and to suit a wide range of courses focused on contemporary urban studies, this text forms a base for all study on shrinking cities for professionals, academics and students in urban design, planning, public administration and sociology. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Perspectives on Growth and Decline 3. When People Leave – The Ruins of Urban Neighborhoods 4. Lessons From a Declining City: Flint, Michigan after 40 Years of Population Loss 5. A New Model for Neighborhood Change in Shrinking Cities 6. Unfamiliar Patterns in the Sun – What Postal Workers Already Know 7. Facing Change in the Central Valley: A Declining Fresno 8. Endless Growth in the Desert? The Fall of Phoenix 9. Abandonment Outside the Magic Kingdom: What Went Wrong in Orlando 10. Conclusion January 2011: 246 x 174: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-59211-6: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-59212-3: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83438-1 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415592123

View any

product

online using the urls below each listing

Nadia Amoroso tackles these questions by taking statistical urban data and exploring how they could be transformed into innovative new maps. The ’unseen’ elements of the city are examined in groundbreaking images throughout the book, which are complemented by interviews with Winy Maas and James Corner, comments by Richard Saul Wurman, and sections by the SENSEable City Lab group and Mark Aubin, co-founder of Google Earth. Selected Contents: Foreword Part 1: Essays 1. Map or Drawing? The Visual Expressions of Hugh Ferriss 2. Graphic Integrity of the Urban Complexity – Lynch, Wurman and Tufte 3. The DATAscapes: The Works of MVRDV 4. The Map-Art: Creative Measures in Landscape Mapping, the Works of James Corner Part 2: Drawings: The Map-Landscape 5.1. The Creative Map 5.2. The Map-Landscapes Afterword 2010: 246 x 189: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-55179-3: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55180-9: £29.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85537-9

In cities around the world, individuals and groups are reclaiming and creating urban sites, temporary spaces and informal gathering places. These ‘insurgent public spaces’ challenge conventional views of how urban areas are defined and used, and how they can transform the city environment. No longer confined to traditional public areas like neighbourhood parks and public plazas, these guerrilla spaces express the alternative social and spatial relationships in our changing cities. With nearly twenty illustrated case studies, this volume shows how instances of insurgent public space occur across the world. Examples range from community gardening in Seattle and Los Angeles, street dancing in Beijing, to the transformation of parking spaces into temporary parks in San Francisco. Drawing on the experiences and knowledge of individuals extensively engaged in the actual implementation of these spaces, Insurgent Public Space is a unique cross-disciplinary approach to the study of public space use, and how it is utilized in the contemporary, urban world. Appealing to professionals and students in both urban studies and more social courses, Hou has brought together valuable commentaries on an area of urbanism which has, up until now, been largely ignored. Selected Contents: Part 1: Appropriating Part 2: Reclaiming Part 3: Pluralizing Part 4: Transgressing Part 5: Uncovering Part 6: Contesting

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415551809

2010: 246 x 174: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-77965-4: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77966-1: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-09300-9

New

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415779661

Insurgencies: Essays in Planning Theory

Whose Public Space?

John Friedmann, UCLA, USA Series: RTPI Library Series

For nearly fifty years John Friedmann’s writings have given shape and direction to the planning profession. Covering transactive planning, radical planning, the concept of the Good City, civil society, rethinking poverty and the diversity of planning cultures, this collection of Friedmann’s most important and influential essays tells a coherent and compelling story about how the evolution of thinking about planning over several decades has helped to shape its practice. With each essay given a new introduction to establish its context and importance, this is an ideal text for the study of planning theory and history.

Selected Contents: 1. The Transactive Style of Planning (1973) 2. The Epistemology of Social Practice: A Critique of Objective Knowledge (1978) 3. Preface to The Good Society (1979) 4. The Mediations of Radical Planning (1987) 5. Rethinking Poverty: The Dis/Empowerment Model (1992) 6. The Rise of Civil Society (1998) 7. Planning Theory Revisited (1998) 8. The Good City: In Defense of Utopian Thinking (2000) 9. The Many Cultures of Planning (2005) 10. The Uses of Planning Theory: A Bibliographic Essay (2008) Epilogue: Citizen Planners in an Era of Limits January 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-78151-0: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78152-7: £19.99

International Case Studies in Urban Design and Development Edited by Ali Madanipour, University of Newcastle, UK Modern urban societies have become fragmented environments consisting of individuals. Here theoretical accounts and case studies address whether making public spaces more accessible can restore the social fabric of the city, highlighting key projects across the world. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Changing Nature of Public Space in City Centres 2. Less Public Than Before? Public Space Improvement in Newcastle City Centre 3. Youth Participation and Revanchist Regimes: Redeveloping Old Eldon Square, Newcastle upon Tyne 4. Can Public Space Improvement Revive the City Centre? The Case of Taichung, Taiwan 5. Change in the Public Spaces of Traditional Cities: Zaria, Nigeria Part 2: Public Space and Everyday Life in Urban Neighbourhoods 6. Marginal Public Spaces in Europe 7. Gating the Streets: The Changing Shape of Public Spaces in South Africa 8. Public Spaces within Modern Residential Areas in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia 9. The Design and Development of Public Open Spaces in an Iranian New Town 10. Making Public Space in Low Income Neighbourhoods in Mexico 11. Co-Production of Public Space: Redefinition of Social Meaning, the Case of Nord-Pas de Calais, France 12. Whose Public Space? 2009: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-55385-8: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55386-5: £29.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86094-6 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415553865

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415781527

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

ur ban s tudi e s s upp l e me n tary r e ad i n g

The Fundamentalist City?

New

2nd Edition

Religiosity and the Remaking of Urban Space

Urban Coding and Planning

Olympic Cities

Edited by Nezar AlSayyad and Mejgan Massoumi, both at University of California, Berkeley, USA

The relationship between urbanism and fundamentalism is a very complex one. This book explores how the dynamics of different forms of religious fundamentalisms are produced, represented, and practiced in the city. It attempts to establish a relationship between two important phenomena: the historic transition of the majority of the world’s population from a rural to an urban existence; and the robust resurgence of religion as a major force in the shaping of contemporary life in many parts of the world. Employing a transnational interrogation anchored in specific geographic regions, the contributors to this volume explore the intellectual and practical challenges posed by fundamentalist groups, movements, and organizations. They focus on how certain ultra religious practices of Christianity, Hinduism, Islam, and Judaism have contributed to the remaking of global urban space. Their work suggests that it is a grave oversimplification to view religious orthodoxies or doctrines as the main cause of urban terrorism or violence. Instead they argue that such phenomena should be understood as a particular manifestation of modernity’s struggles. Nezar AlSayyad and Mejgan Massoumi’s book provides fascinating reading for those interested in religion and the city, with thought provoking pieces from experts in anthropology, geography sociology, religious studies, and urban studies. Selected Contents: Part 1: Fundamentalisms: Between City and Nation The Fundamentalist City? Why in the City? Explaining Urban Fundamentalism. The Civility of Inegalitarian Citizenships Part 2: Fundamentalisms and Urbanism American National Identity, the Rise of the Modern City, and the Birth of Protestant Fundamentalism. Producing and Contesting the ’Communalized City’: Hindutva Politics and Urban Space in Ahmedabad, India. On Religiosity and Spatiality: Lessons from Hezbollah in Beirut. Hamas in Gaza Refugee Camps: The Construction of Trapped Spaces for the Survival of Fundamentalism Part 3: Identity, Tradition, and Fundamentalisms Abraham’s Urban Footsteps: Political Geography and Religious Radicalism in Israel/Palestine. Fundamentalism at the Urban Frontier: the Taliban in Peshawar. Taking the (Inner) City for God: Ambiguities of Urban Social Engagement among Conservative White Evangelicals. Postsecular Urbanisms: Situating Delhi within the Rhetorical Landscape of Hindutva. Excluding and Including the ’Other’ in the Global City: Religious Mission among Muslim and Catholic Migrants in London 2010: 234 x 156: 328pp Hb: 978-0-415-77935-7: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77936-4: £29.99 eBook: 978-0-203-84459-5 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415779364

Edited by Stephen Marshall, Barlett School of Planning, University College London, UK Series: Planning, History and Environment Series Urban codes have a profound influence on urban form, affecting the design and placement of buildings, streets and public spaces. Historically, their use has helped create some of our best-loved urban environments, while recent advances in coding have been a growing focus of attention, particularly in Britain and North America. However, the full potential for the role of codes has yet to be realized. In Urban Coding and Planning, Stephen Marshall and his contributors investigate the nature and scope of coding; its purposes; the kinds of environments it creates; and, perhaps most importantly, its relationship to urban planning. By bringing together historical and ongoing traditions of coding from around the world – with chapters describing examples from the United Kingdom, France, India, China, Japan, Australia, South Africa, the United States and Latin America – this book provides lessons for today’s theory and practice of place-making. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. A Chronicle of Urban Codes in Pre-Industrial London’s Streets and Squares 3. The Controlling Urban Code of Enlightenment Scotland 4. The Ideal and the Real: Urban Codes in the Spanish-American Lettered City 5. Paradigms for Design: the Vastu Vidya Codes of India 6. Prescribing the Ideal City: Building Codes and Planning Principles in Beijing 7. Machizukuri and Urban Codes in Historical and Contemporary Kyoto 8. Adelaide’s Urban Design: Pendular Swings in Concepts and Codes 9. Coding in the French Planning System: From Building Line to Morphological Zoning 10. Coding as ‘Bottom-Up’ Planning: Developing a New African Urbanism 11. How Codes Shaped Development in the United States, and Why They Should Be Changed 12. Conclusions March 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-44126-1: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44127-8: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415441278

Place, Race, and Story Essays on the Past and Future of Historic Preservation Ned Kaufman, Pratt Institute, USA In Place, Race, and Story, author Ned Kaufman has collected his own essays dedicated to the proposition of giving the next generation of preservationists not only a foundational knowledge of the field of study, but more ideas on where they can take it. Through both big-picture essays considering preservation across time, and descriptions of work on specific sites, the essays in this collection trace the themes of place, race, and story in ways that raise questions, stimulate discussion, and offer a different perspective on these common ideas. Including unpublished essays as well as established works by the author, Place, Race, and Story provides a new outline for a progressive preservation movement – the revitalized movement for social progress. Selected Contents: Part 1: Place, Race and Story: Basic Issues Part 2: Architecture in and out of Place: Historical Perspectives Part 3: Winning and Losing in New York City Part 4: Choosing a Different Future 2009: 229 x 152: 440pp Hb: 978-0-415-96539-2: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96540-8: £24.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415965408

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

City Agendas, Planning, and the World’s Games, 1896 – 2016 Edited by John R. Gold, Oxford Brookes University, UK and Margaret M. Gold, London Metropolitan University, UK Series: Planning, History and Environment Series

Providing a full overview of the changing relationship between cities and the Olympic events, this substantially revised and enlarged edition builds on the success of its predecessor. Its coverage takes account of important new scholarship as well as adding reflections on the experience of staging Beijing 2008 and Vancouver 2010, the state of preparations for London 2012, and the plans for the Games scheduled for Sochi in 2014 and Rio de Janeiro 2016. The book is divided into three parts that provide overviews of the urban legacy of the four component Olympic festivals; systematic surveys of five key aspects of activity involved in staging the Olympics; and ten chronologically arranged portraits of host cities. As controversy over the growing size and expense of the Olympics continues, this timely assessment of the Games’ development and the complex agendas that host cities attach to the event will be essential reading for urban and sports historians, urban geographers, planners and all concerned with understanding the relationship between cities and culture.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: The Olympic Festivals 2. From A to B: The Summer Olympics, 1896–2008 3. The Winter Olympics: Driving Urban Change, 1924–2014 4. The Cultural Olympiads: Reviving the Panegyris 5. The Paralympics Part 2: Planning and Management 6. Financing the Games 7. Promoting the Olympic City 8. Olympic Security 9. Urban Regeneration and Renewal 10. Olympic Tourism Part 3: City Portraits 11. Berlin 1936 12. Mexico City 1968 13. Montreal 1976 14. Barcelona 1992 15. Sydney 2000 16. Athens 2004 17. Beijing 2008 18. London 2012 19. Rio de Janeiro 2016 20. Afterword 2010: 246 x 174: 464pp Hb: 978-0-415-48657-6: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48658-3: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415486583

Free Monthly Newsletter Ensure that you’re kept up-to-date with news and information in your area of interest by signing up to our Geography Newsletter. Signing up is quick and easy – simply email geography@routledge.com highlighting your areas of interest, and start receiving new title information and special offers direct to your inbox today!

u rban st u die s supp leme n tary r e adi n g

2nd Edition

New

Neo-Bohemia

The New Political Economy of Urban Education

The Good City

Neoliberalism, Race, and the Right to the City

Allan B. Jacobs, University of California, Berkeley, USA

Pauline Lipman, University of Illinois-Chicago, USA

Art and Commerce in the Postindustrial City Richard Lloyd, Vanderbilt University, USA ’Lloyd has done an excellent job of fleshing out a postmodern bohemia This is an insightful look at the hip neighborhoods that loom so large on the cultural radar and the role they play in the new global division of labor.’ – Sharon Zukin, Sociology, Brooklyn College

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Production and Neighborhood 3. Bohemia 4. Grit as Glamour 5. Living Like an Artist 6. The Celebrity Neighborhood 7 . The Neighborhood in Cultural Production 8. Making the Scene 9. The Digital Bohemia 10. The Bohemia and the Spirit of Flexibility

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415870979

Cities, Allan B. Jacobs contends, ought to be magnificent, beautiful places to live. They should be places where people can be fulfilled, where they can be what they can be, where there is freedom, love, ideas, excitement, quiet and joy. Cities ought to be the ultimate manifestation of society’s collective achievements.

Series: Critical Social Thought

Neo-Bohemia brings the study of bohemian culture down to the street level, while maintaining a commitment to understanding broader historical and economic urban contexts. Simultaneously readable and academic, this book anticipates key urban trends at the dawn of the twenty-first century, shedding light on both the nature of contemporary bohemias and the cities that house them. The relevance of understanding the trends it depicts has only increased, especially in light of the current urban crisis puncturing a long period of gentrification and new economy development, putting us on the precipice, perhaps, of the next new bohemia.

2010: 229 x 152: 328pp Hb: 978-0-415-87096-2: £99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-87097-9: £26.99

Reflections and Imaginations

Pauline Lipman provides an insightful analysis of the relationship between education policy and the neoliberal economic, political, and ideological processes that are reshaping cities in the United States and around the globe.

Using Chicago as a case study of the interconnectedness of neoliberal urban policies on housing, economic development, race, and education, Lipman explores larger implications for equity, justice, and ’the right to the city’. She draws on scholarship in critical geography, urban sociology and anthropology, education policy, and critical analyses of race. Her synthesis of these lenses gives added weight to her critical appraisal and hope for the future, offering a significant contribution to current arguments about urban schooling and how we think about relations between neoliberal education reforms and the transformation of cities. Lipman pushes the analysis one step further toward a new educational and social paradigm rooted in radical political and economic democracy. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Neoliberal Urbanism and Education Policy 3. Dismantling Public Schools, Displacing African-Americans and Latinos 4. Politics of Mixed-Income Schools and Housing: Moralizing the Poor, Building the Neoliberal City 5. With Cristen Jenkins: Venture Philanthropy-From Government to Governance 6. Choice and Empowerment-The Cultural Politics of Charter Schools 7. Education and the Right to the City-Another World is Possible and Necessary March 2011: 229 x 152: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-80223-9: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-80224-6: £21.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415802246

Allan B. Jacobs is one of the world’s best known planners and urban design practitioners, with a long and distinguished international career. Drawing on his professional experience of almost sixty years, Jacobs guides the reader through the lessons he’s learnt as a planner and lover of cities. Cities from Brazil, Italy, India, Japan, China and the US are featured. Written with a wonderfully engaging, humorous tone and Jacobs’ own drawings, The Good City transfers lessons on city design, building and urban change to all those willing to help cities become the magnificent, beautiful places they should be - and encourages all inhabitants to learn to appreciate and explore their own cities. Selected Contents: Part 1: Experiencing Cities An Introduction. Part 2: Learning From Calcutta Why India. Part 3: Learning in Italy Walls and Gates. Being Apart. Gianicolo Busts. Via Costa Masciarelli: A Question of Values. Part 4: City People-Fragments Traffic Cop. Excellent! Immigrants. Practicing. Part 5: Breaking and Making Community Cleveland and the Unmaking of City. The Etcher of Caprano. Liberty Bakery. Stopping By. Curitiba and the Making of Community. Part 6: World Class Cities Memos on Pudong. Part 7: City Certainties Traffic is Not a Problem. Parking is Not a Problem. Things Can Get Better or Worse. What You Believe Counts. Part 8: San Francisco Reflecting on San Francisco. The Civil Service Giants. Part 9: The Good City February 2011: 178 x 254: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-59350-2: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-59353-3: £19.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415593533

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

The New Economy of the Inner City

Thomas A. Hutton

2008

Paperback

978-0-415-56932-3

£24.99

Hardback

978-0-415-77134-4

£89.00

Common Ground?

Anthony M. Orum and Zachary P. Neal

2009

Paperback

978-0-415-99727-0

£23.99

Hardback

978-0-415-99689-1

£80.00

e-Book

978-0-203-87396-0

Hardback

978-0-415-80098-3

Paperback

978-0-415-80099-0

£25.99

Hardback

978-0-415-37575-7

£99.00

Paperback

978-0-415-37576-4

£26.99

e-Book

978-0-203-09912-4

Hardback

978-0-415-39271-6

e-Book

978-0-203-08753-4

Hardback

978-0-415-31227-1

Paperback

978-0-415-31228-8

£26.99

Paperback

978-0-415-36828-5

£28.99

Fixing Broken Cities Urban Utopias

Life in the Megalopolis City Publics

John Kromer Malcolm Miles

Lucia Sa

2009 2007

2007

Sophie Watson

2006

In the Nature of Cities

Edited by Nik Heynen, Maria Kaika and Erik Swyngedouw

2005

Ordinary Cities

Jennifer Robinson

2005

Complimentary Exam Copy

£90.00

£89.00 £95.00

Hardback

978-0-415-36827-8

£115.00

Paperback

978-0-415-30488-7

£29.99

Hardback

978-0-415-30487-0

£95.00

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

ur ban s tudi e s m r e s e arc h mon og r a p h s

Urban Studies research Monographs Forthcoming

Globalization, Modernity and the City John Rennie Short, University of Maryland Baltimore County, USA Series: Routledge Studies in Human Geography We live in a world of big cities. Urbanization, globalization and modernization have received considerable attention but rarely are the connections and relations between them the subjects of similar attention. Cities are an integral part of the network of globalization and important sites of modernization. Globalization, Modernity and The City weaves together broad social themes with detailed urban analysis to explore the connections between the rise of big cities, the creation of a global network and the making of the modern world. It explains the growth of big cities, the urban bias of global flows and the creation of metropolitan modernities. The text develops broad theories of the subtle and complex interactions between urbanization, globalization and modernization in a sweep of the urban experience across the globe. Thematic chapters explore the making of the modern city in profiles of the growth of urban spectaculars, the role of flanerie, the traffic issues of the modernist city, recurring issues of urban utopias and the rise of the primate city. Detailed case studies are drawn from cities in Australia, China and the USA. Urban snapshots of cities such as Atlanta, Barcelona, Istanbul, Mumbai and Seoul provide a truly global coverage. The book links together broad social themes with deep urban analysis. This wellwritten, accessible and illustrated text will appeal to the broad audience of all those interested in the urban present and the metropolitan future. August 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-67692-2: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80886-3 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415676922

Searching for the Just City Debates in Urban Theory and Practice Edited by Peter Marcuse, James Connolly, Johannes Novy, Ingrid Olivo, Cuz Potter and Justin Steil, all at Columbia University, USA Series: Questioning Cities If today’s cities are full of injustices, what would a ’Just City’ look like? Contributors to this volume including David Harvey, Peter Marcuse and Susan Fainstein define the concept, examining it from multiple angles in addition to questioning it and suggesting alternatives.

Forthcoming

Urban Assemblages

New Economic Spaces in Asian Cities

How Actor-Network Theory Changes Urban Studies

From Industrial Restructuring to the Cultural Turn Edited by Peter W. Daniels, University of Birmingham, UK, Kong Chong Ho, National University of Singapore and Thomas A. Hutton, University of British Columbia, Canada Series: Routledge Studies in Human Geography New Economic Spaces in Asian Cities offers a vivid contribution to our understanding of the ongoing transformation of Asia’s urban system, including the critical intersections of global and local-regional dynamics in processes of new industry formation and the relayering of space in the Asian metropolis. The synthesis of empirical profiles, normative insights, and theoretical reference points enhances the book’s interest for scholars and students in such fields of Asian studies, urban and cultural studies, and urban and economic geography, as well as for and policy specialists and urban/community planners. Selected Contents: Part 1. Theory – Situating the New Cultural Economy in the Asian City 1. Introduction 2. Changing Landscapes of Services and Restructuring in Asian Cities 3. The Cultural Turn and Urban Development in Asia 4. The Cultural Economy and the Relayering of Space in the City 5. Film Festivals in Asian Cities Part 2. The New Cultural Economy and the Reconstruction Space in Asian Cities 6. Innovative Tokyo 7. Reinvention or Path Depedendency? Transition of a Periphery Office District in the New Economy of the Teheran Valley, Seoul 8. Turning the Hong-dae Area into a Cool ‘Cultural District’ in Seoul 9. From ‘Paris of the East’ to the ‘New York of Asia’? The development of Shanghai as a Banking Centre 10. Suzhou Creek and the Cultural Quarter Program in Shanghai 11. Selling Place Through Art: The Creation and Establishment of Beijing’s District 798 12. Shenzhen’s Evolution from Tabula Rasa Laboratory of new Chinese Urbanism to Post-industrial UNESCO Creative City of Design 13. The Cultural Economy in the Developmental State: A Comparison of Little India and Chinatown in Singapore 14. Conclusion: Implications for Theory, Policy and Planning Practice July 2011: 234 x 156: 342pp Hb: 978-0-415-56773-2: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86015-1 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415567732

Asian Cities, Migrant Labor and Contested Spaces Edited by Tai-Chee Wong, National Institute of Education, Singapore and Jonathan Rigg, University of Durham, UK Series: Routledge Contemporary Asia Series This book explores how migration plays a central role in the renewing and reworking of urban spaces in the rapidly changing cities of Asia. The contributors examine the roles and effects of different forms of migration in the arena of urban change, considering low-skilled domestic migrants, professional transnational migrant and legal and illegal international migrants.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Why Justice? Theoretical Foundations of the Just City Debate Section 2: What are the Limits of the Just City? Expanding the Debate Section 3: How Do We Realize Just Cities? From Debate to Action

Selected Contents: Part 1: The International Migration Dimension in Asian Cities Part 2: The Domestic Migration Dimension in Asian Cities

2009: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-77613-4: £85.00

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415564489

2010: 234 x 156: 312pp Hb: 978-0-415-56448-9: £75.00

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415776134

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

Edited by Ignacio Farías, Social Science Research Center, Germany and Thomas Bender, New York University, USA Series: Questioning Cities This book proposes-and its various chapters offer demonstrations-importing into urban studies a body of theories, concepts, and perspectives developed in the field of science and technology studies (STS) and, more specifically, Actor-Network Theory (ANT). Selected Contents: Introduction Section 1: Towards a Flat Ontology? 1. Gelleable Spaces, Eventful Geographies: the Case of Santiago’s Experimental Music Scene 2. Globalizations Big and Small: Notes on Urban Studies, Actor-network Theory, and Geographical Scale 3. Urban Studies without ‘scale’: Localizing the Global Through Singapore 4. Assembling Asturias: Scaling Devices and Cultural Leverage Section 2: A Non-Human Urban Ecology 5. How do we Co-Produce Urban Transport Systems and the City? The Case of Transmilenio and Bogotá 6. Changing Obdurate Urban Objects: The Attempts to Reconstruct the Highway through Maastricht 7. Mutable Immobiles. Building Conversion as a Problem of Quasi-Technologies 8. Conviction and Commotion: On Soundspheres, Technopolitics and Urban Space Section 3: The Multiple City 9. The Reality of Urban Tourism: Framed Activity and Virtual Ontology 10. Assembling Money and the Senses. Revisiting Georg Simmel and the City 11. The City as Value Locus: Markets, Technologies, and the Problem of Worth 12. Second Empire, Second Nature, Secondary World: Verne and Baudelaire in the Capital of the Nineteenth Century Postscript: Re-Assembling the City. Networks and Urban Imaginaries 2009: 234 x 156: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-48662-0: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87063-1 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415486620

Rights of Passage Sidewalks and the Regulation of Public Flow Nicholas Blomley, Simon Fraser University, Canada Series: Social Justice Rights of Passage: Sidewalks and the Regulation of Public Flow documents a powerful and under-researched form of urban governance that focuses on pedestrian flow. Selected Contents: 1. Pedestrianism: Pedestrianism and Police. Pedestrianism, People and Things. Pedestrianism and Social Justice. Overview of Contents 2. Civic Humanism and the Sidewalk: The Sidewalk as Political Space. The Sidewalk as Civic Space. The Sidewalk as Walking Space 3. Thinking Like an Engineer. Administrative Pedestrianism. Pervasive Pedestrianism. The Taken for Granted 4. Producing and Policing the Sidewalk: Sidewalk Law; Obstruction and Encroachments. Other Sidewalk Rationalities 5. The History of Pedestrianism. The Invention of the Sidewalk. The Reformist Sidewalk. Administrative Pedestrianism at Work. The Public Sidewalk. The Incomplete Sidewalk 6. Judicial Pedestrianism: Introduction. The Public Highway 7. Obstructions of Justice?: Speech, Protest and Circulation. Sidewalks, the Homeless, and Judicial Pedestrianism. Things and Bodies 8. Taking a Constitutional: Circulation, Begging, and the Mobile Self: Introduction; Political Pedestrianism. Conclusions 9. Hidden in Plain View 2010: 234 x 156: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-57561-4: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415575614

u rban st u die s rese arch mon og r ap hs

Forthcoming

New

Shrinking Cities

Chinatowns in a Transnational World

International Perspectives and Policy Implications

Myths and Realities of an Urban Phenomenon

Edited by Karina M. Pallagst, University of California at Berkeley, USA, Thorsten Wiechmann, Institute of Ecological and Regional Development, Germany and Cristina Martinez-Fernandez, University Western Sydney, Australia

Edited by Vanessa Künnemann and Ruth Mayer both at University of Hannover, Germany

Series: Routledge Advances in Geography The shrinking city phenomenon has affected metropolitan areas around the world, leading to dramatic decline in their economic and social bases. Offering case studies of cities from five different continents, this volume considers specific economic, social, environmental, cultural and land-use issues as it places ’shrinking cities’ in a global perspective. September 2011: 229 x 152: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-80485-1: £65.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415804851

Forthcoming

Mobile Interfaces in Public Spaces

Interrelating different locations and time frames, this volume discloses both the numerous analogies and fascinating differences which characterize the myths and realities of Chinatowns in Europe and the United States. Selected Contents: Introduction: A ’Bit of Orient Set Down in the Heart of a Western Metropolis’: The Chinatown in the United States and Europe 1. New York After Chinatown: Canal Street and the ’New World Order’ 2. ’Chinese Quarters’: Maritime Labor, Chinese Migration, and Local Imagination in Rotterdam and Hamburg, 1900-1950 3. Cosmopolitan Lifestyles and ’Yellow Quarters’: Traces of Chinese Life in Germany, 1921-1941 4. Rehabilitating Chinatown at Mid-Century: Chinese Americans, Race, and US Cultural Diplomacy 5. ’Curious Kisses’: The Chinatown Fantasies of Thomas Burke 6. ’The Greatest Novelty of the Age’: Fu-Manchu, Chinatown, and the Global City 7. The Donaldina Cameron Myth and the Rescue of America, 1910-2002 8. ’Showing What It Is to Be Chinese’: China/ Town Authenticity and Hybridity in Pearl S. Buck’s 9. ’Food Town’: Chinatown and the American Journey of Chinese Food 10. London’s Chinatown and the Changing Shape of Chinese Diaspora 11. Chinatowns in Transition: Between Ethnic Enclave and Global Emblem April 2011: 229 x 152: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-89039-7: £75.00

Locational Privacy, Control and Urban Sociability

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415890397

Adriana De Souza E. Silva and Jordan Frith, both at North Carolina State University, USA Series: Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies This book focuses on the social and political implications of using location-aware technologies in public spaces. It aims at analyzing not only how our traditional ideas of public space and social interactions are challenged by the use of these technologies, but also how existing concepts of privacy and sociability determine the design and use of these types of technology. The authors frame the development of location-aware mobile devices within the history of previous media, looking at the way the book, the walkman, and the ipod have also helped individuals manage their interactions with public spaces. The authors also look at the privacy concerns raised with the use of these earlier forms of media, specifically how they challenged the borders between what is considered private and what is public. In the second half of the book, the authors describe the way in which adding location to mobile communication technologies, such as cell phones, urges us to discuss and reframe social issues such as privacy, surveillance, and exclusion, along with the very concept of public space. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Mobile Media History 1. Personalization 2. Privacy Part 2: Location-Awareness in Public Spaces 3. Mobile Phones 4. LocationAware Media 5. Control and Personalization 6. Privacy and Surveillance 7. Conclusion

Transforming Urban Waterfronts Fixity and Flow Edited by Gene Desfor and Jennefer Laidley both at York University, Canada, Quentin Stevens, The Bartlett School of Planning, University College London, UK and Dirk Schubert, HafenCity University Hamburg, Germany Series: Routledge Advances in Geography The collection engages with major theoretical debates and empirical findings on how waterfronts transform and have been transformed in port-cities in North and South America, Europe, and the Caribbean. It brings together authors from a broad range of disciplinary backgrounds to tackle vital questions of waterfront development. Selected Contents: Section 1: The Waterfront and the City Section 2: Global and Local Dynamics on the Waterfront Section 3: Naturalizing Development and Developing Nature Section 4: New Practices of Property-Led Development 2010: 229 x 152: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-87493-9: £70.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415874939

October 2011: 229 x 152: 228pp Hb: 978-0-415-88823-3: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415888233

backlsit Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Can Neighbourhoods Save the City?

Edited by Frank Moulaert, Erik Swyngedouw, Flavia Martinelli and Sara Gonzalez

2010

Hardback

978-0-415-48588-3

£90.00

The Multiplex in India

Adrian Athique and Douglas Hill

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-46837-4

£85.00

Globalization, Violence and the Visual Culture of Cities

Edited by Christoph Lindner

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-48214-1

£90.00

e-Book

978-0-203-88507-9

Whose Urban Renaissance?

Edited by Libby Porter and Kate Shaw

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-45682-1

£85.00

Sensing Cities

Monica Montserrat Degen

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-39799-5

£85.00

Cities, Nationalism and Democratization

Scott A. Bollens

2007

Hardback

978-0-415-41947-5

£90.00

Cities in Globalization

Edited by Peter Taylor, Ben Derudder, Pieter Saey and Frank Witlox

2006

Hardback

978-0-415-40984-1

£105.00

Urban Development in Post-Reform China

Fulong Wu, Jiang Xu and Anthony Gar-On Yeh

2006

Hardback

978-0-415-39359-1

£95.00

World Bank and Urban Development

Edward Ramsamy

2006

Hardback

978-0-415-34439-5

£90.00

Private Cities

Georg Glasze, Chris Webster and Klaus Frantz

2005

Hardback

978-0-415-34170-7

£95.00

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

ur ban s tudi e s r e f e r en c e

Urban Studies Reference New

Companion to Urban Design Edited by Tridib Banerjee, University of Southern California, USA and Anastasia Loukaitou-Sideris, University of Los Angeles, USA

Today urban design has emerged as an important area of intellectual pursuit, with applications at many different scales – ranging from the block or street scale to the scale of metropolitan and regional landscapes. The field interfaces with many aspects of contemporary public policy – multiculturalism, economic development, climate change, energy conservation, sustainable development, community livability, and related issues. The Companion includes original contributions from a select group of internationally renowned scholars and practitioners. Selected Contents: Part 1: Roots Part 2: Theoretical Perspectives Part 3: Influences Part 4: Technologies and Methods Part 5: Process Part 6: Components Part 7: Debates Part 8: Global Trends Part 9: New Directions January 2011: 246 x 174: 736pp Hb: 978-0-415-55364-3: £130.00

New

4 Volume Set

The Routledge Handbook of Urban Ecology

Urban Regeneration and Renewal

Edited by Ian Douglas, University of Manchester, UK, David Goode, University College London, UK, Mike Houck, Portland State University, USA and Rusong Wang, Chinese Academy of Sciences, China

Edited by Andrew Tallon, University of the West of England, UK

This Handbook contains original contributions from leading academics and practitioners from across the world to provide an in-depth coverage of the main elements of practical urban ecology. The sixty-five chapters provide practitioners and students with the wealth of interdisciplinary information needed to manage the biota and green landscapes in urban areas. In six parts it deals with the philosophies, concepts and history of urban ecology; followed by consideration of the biophysical character of the urban environment and the diverse habitats found within it. It then examines human relationships with urban nature, the health, economic and environmental benefits of urban ecology before discussing the methods used in urban ecology and ways of putting the science into practice. Selected Contents: Part 1: Context, History and Philosophies Part 2: The Urban Ecological Environment Part 3: The Nature of Urban Habitats Part 4: Ecosystem Services and Urban Ecology Part 5: Methodologies Part 6: Applications and Policy Implications

This new title in the Routledge series, Critical Concepts in Urban Studies, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the explosion in research output on regeneration and renewal as a significant historical and contemporary urban process of economic, social, cultural, and political importance. Edited by a leading scholar, this Routledge Major Work brings together in four volumes the canonical and the best cutting-edge scholarship on the topic. Selected Contents: Volume 1: Part 1: Cities in Transition Globalization and Urban Competitiveness. From Managerialism to Urban Entrepreneurialism. Social Capital, Exclusion, Cohesion, and Diversity. Urban Governance and the Post-Fordist City. Volume 2: Postmodernism and Urban Space: Part 2: Responses to Urban Change from National Governments Postwar Physical Redevelopment and Area-Based Social Welfare Projects. Entrepreneurial and Property-Led Regeneration. Economic Competition in Urban Policy. Combining Economic Development and Social Justice in Urban Policy. Evaluating National Government Urban Regeneration and Renewal Policies. Volume 3: Part 3: City Responses to Urban Change Place Marketing. Expanding the Leisure and Cultural Economies. Creative Cities and Creative Industries. Sport and Regeneration. City Centre Retail Regeneration. Volume 4: Housing-Led Regeneration and Gentrification Community Involvement in Urban Regeneration Partnerships. Urban Sustainable Development and Sustainable Communities. 2010: 234 x 156: 1840pp Hb: 978-0-415-47506-8: £685.00

2010: 246 x 174: 688pp Hb: 978-0-415-49813-5: £150.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83926-3

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415553643

Series: Critical Concepts in Urban Studies

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415475068

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415498135

Forthcoming 4 Volume Set

The Making of Olympic Cities

eFocus on Urban Studies

Edited by John R. Gold, Oxford Brookes University, UK and Margaret M. Gold, London Metropolitan University, UK

New eBook Library Collection

Series: Critical Concepts in Urban Studies

For more information, pricing enquiries or to order your 30 day free trial, please contact your local online sales team:

Edited and introduced by two leading scholars, this new four-volume collection from Routledge brings together key primary-source materials and the best scholarship and serious commentary to elucidate and explore the planning, making, and generation of Olympic cities. The gathered materials (some of which are reproduced in facsimile to give users a strong sense of immediacy to the original texts) cover topics such as how cities have embraced the Olympics into their town-planning strategies; built new stadia and sports facilities; and constructed new transport and other communications networks. From what is widely seen as the paradigm of Olympics-led urban regeneration (Barcelona, 1992) to the planning disaster of Montreal, 1976, issues around the short-term impact, and longer-term legacy, of the Olympics on various cities are also closely interrogated.

UK and Rest of the world Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6062 Email: online.sales@tandf.co.uk

October 2011: 234 x 156: 1600pp Hb: 978-0-415-55351-3: £650.00

Urbanization has been one of the key forces in the shaping of the modern world. This extensive new resource provides a rich and diverse range of perspectives on urban phenomena. A wide range of issues are addressed including cities and culture; sustainability and climate change; race, class and gender in the city; gentrification and urban change. Different disciplines are represented including geography, planning, economics and sociology. Coverage is global, including both developed and developing countries, and the western and non western worlds. eFocus on Urban Studies is available as a subscription package with 10 new eBooks added per year. View the complete package here: www.ebooksubscriptions.com/eFocusUrbanStudies

United States, Canada and South America Tel: 1-888-318-2367 Email: e-reference@taylorandfrancis.com

eBooks

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415553513

tou rism t e x tbook s

Tourism Textbooks

Forthcoming

Forthcoming in 2012

Tourism, Poverty and Development in the Developing World

2nd Edition

Andrew Holden, Bedfordshire University, UK

Student’s Guide to Writing Dissertations and Theses in Tourism Studies and Related Disciplines

Tourism Geography A New Synthesis Stephen Williams, Staffordshire University, UK This second edition of Tourism Geography develops a critical understanding of how different geographies of tourism are created and maintained. Drawing on both historical and contemporary perspectives, the discussion – which is in three main parts – connects tourism to key geographical concepts relating to globalization, mobility, new geographies of production and consumption, and post-industrial change. Part one examines how spatial patterns of tourism are formed and evolve through time. Part two offers an extended discussion of how tourism relates to places that are toured, examining physical and economic development, socio-cultural and environmental relations and the role of tourism planning. Part three develops a range of new material for this second edition that considers important contemporary influences upon tourism geographies, including place promotion, new forms of urban tourism, heritage, identity and embodied forms of tourism.

Featuring international case studies and supported by up-to-date statistics, the text offers a concise yet comprehensive review of tourism geography and how geographers can interpret this important contemporary process. Written primarily as a student text, each chapter includes guidance for further study and summary bibliographies that form the basis for independent work. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Tourism, Geography and Geographies of Tourism Part 1: Tourism Development & Spatial Change 2. Tourism Places and the Place of Tourism: Resort Development and the Popularisation of Tourism 3. From Camber Sands to Waikiki: the Expanding Horizons of International Tourism Part 2: Tourism Relations 4. Costs and Benefits: the Physical and Economic Development of Tourism 5. Tourism, Sustainability and Environmental Change 6. Socio-cultural Relations in Tourism 7. Strategies for Development: the Role of Planning in Tourism Part 3: Understanding the Spaces of Tourism 8. Inventing Places: Cultural Constructions and Tourism Geographies 9. Urban Tourism in a Changing World 10. The Past as a Foreign Country: Heritage Attractions in Contemporary Tourism 11. Tourism, Consumption and Identity

This is the first book to provide a holistic, explicit and detailed introduction to the relationship of poverty and tourism development within the context of developing countries. The book is divided into three distinct sections, progressing from an evaluation of the key concepts; to the causal factors of poverty; to how tourism is being implemented in policy and practice to reduce poverty and the relationship of tourism and poverty in the future. The theoretical framework inherent to the text is inter-disciplinary, incorporating tourism, geography, politics, economics, environmental studies, development studies, sociology and history literature, to provide the reader with a range of perspectives from which to explore the key issues of the tourism and poverty relationship. It integrates examples and original case studies from varying geographical developing regions including Latin American, Asia and Africa to show practical insights into tourism’s role in poverty alleviation. To encourage reflection on main themes address and critical thinking ‘Think points’, discussion questions and links to further reading are included in each chapter. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introducing the Key Concepts of Tourism Development and Poverty 1. Understanding Tourism as an Agent of Development 2. Why is Development Important? 3. Poverty: It’s Meanings and Causes Part 2: Causes of Poverty: From the Micro to Macro 4. The Relationship of Place and Poverty 5. The Global Political Economy and Structural Causes of Poverty 6. Climate Change, Poverty and Tourism Part 3: The Possibilities and Limitations of the Use of Tourism in Poverty Reduction 7. Critiquing Tourism Policy and Poverty Reduction 8. The Way Forward: Limitations and Strategies for Use of Tourism in Poverty Alliviation November 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-56626-1: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56627-8: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86154-7 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415566278

2009: 246 x 174: 328pp Hb: 978-0-415-39425-3: £99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39426-0: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87755-5

Tim Coles, University of Exeter, UK, David Timothy Duval, University of Otago, New Zealand and Gareth Shaw, University of Exeter, UK Around the world every year many thousands of students have to complete dissertations or theses as part of their undergraduate or masters studies in tourism and related subjects. Often the dissertation or thesis represents the culmination of their programme as a substantial piece of self-directed work. More than just a means to consolidate their final grade, it is also an exciting chance to conduct intensive research on a topic of their choosing. It can also be a gateway to further periods of study as well as job offers and future career paths. Yet for all these reasons, the dissertation is viewed by many students as a tricky challenge. This book intends to take the stress and anxiety out of doing a dissertation in tourism studies and related disciplines. The dissertation process is examined from the germination of an idea to the submission, presentation and assessment of the final document. We offer a framework for conducting dissertations in the English-speaking world which students can adopt to varying degrees in their research at the undergraduate and masters levels. We aim to debunk the popular myths and common pitfalls of doing a dissertation. Rather than view the dissertation as a single, overwhelming project, the dissertation is presented as a series of more modest, manageable yet crucially inter-linked tasks that all students can successfully complete through effective time management. Dissertations are not to be underestimated and they demand great care and attention from students, but they can also be immensely rewarding and enriching experiences academically and personally. One of the distinctive features of modern higher education is the number of students studying abroad and writing in a foreign language. This book is also written with these students specifically in mind and it draws directly on our overseas students experiences of the dissertation process. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Some Basics About Dissertations Part 1: Generating Your Topic and Approach 3. Selecting a Topic 4. Developing a Plan: Timelines, Budgets and Managing Your Sanity 5. What’s Been Done Before? 6. Choosing Your Method: Some Basic Considerations Part 2: Developing Your Proposal / Getting Your Proposal Approved 7. Formulating Your Research Proposal 8. Your Personal Safety 9. Ethical Considerations Part 3: Conducting Your Research 10. Working With Your Adviser and/or Your Advisory Committee 11. Designing Your Research Tools 12. Implementing Your Research Tools Part 4: Writing up Your Research 13. Analysing Your Data 14. Structuring Your Dissertation/Theses Part 5: Finishing Off 15. Some Final Considerations 16. Assessment and Examinations February 2012: 246 x 174: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-46018-7: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46019-4: £22.99

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415394260

FREE P&P Online!

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415460194

Simple and secure online ordering, please visit www.routledge.com/geography and receive FREE postage & packaging* for online orders over £20. *UK customers only

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

tour i s m te x tbo o k s

Understanding and Managing Tourism Impacts

2nd Edition

Forthcoming

The Economics of Tourism

An Integrated Approach

Tourist Cities

Mike J. Stabler, University of Reading, UK, Andreas Papatheodorou, University of the Aegean, Greece and M. Thea Sinclair, University of Kent, UK

Dan Knox, Liverpool John Moores University, UK

C. Michael Hall, University of Canterbury, New Zealand and Alan A. Lew, Northern Arizona University, USA Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility

This book discusses the complexity of understanding how tourism impacts the world and how the world impacts tourism, from the global scale to the local and individual scale.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Conceptualising Tourism 2. Understanding Impacts 3. Economic Impacts 4. Socio-cultural Impacts 5. Physical Impacts 6. Integrated Approaches to Tourism Impacts: The Role of Planning 7. The Future of Tourism 2009: 234 x 156: 392pp Hb: 978-0-415-77132-0: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77133-7: £28.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87587-2 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415771337

2nd Edition

Issues in Cultural Tourism Studies Melanie Smith, Corvinus University, Budapest, Hungary

’The broad concept of cultural tourism continues to permeate the work of both tourism researchers and policy makers. With its thoughtful theoretical perspectives and its global cases this book provides a valuable and accessible entry point to the complexities and multi-layered nature of culture / tourism nexus.’ – Dr Mike Robinson, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK An influential summary and synthesis of all of the major issues in global cultural tourism and presented in an accessible way using a diverse range of international case studies. 2009: 246 x 174: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-46711-7: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46712-4: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86985-7 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415467124

This new edition of The Economics of Tourism reflects the tremendous changes that have occurred in the tourism sector in the last twelve years. It recognizes that the nature of tourism demand and supply is being transformed by innovations in information communication technologies, market liberalization and climate change. Paralleling this, there is much greater interest in the study of tourism by both students and researchers in mainstream economics.

This book will continue to make accessible for the non-specialist, the application and relevance of economics to tourism. Extensively revised and updated, including research and case studies the textbook will be an indispensable resource for both students and researchers. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction and Demand Theory in Tourism Part 2: The Economics of Tourism Supply Part 3: The Economics of Tourism at a National, Regional and International Level Part 4: The Economics of Environmental Issues in Tourism and an Appraisal of the Economic Analysis of Tourism

This book considers the relationship between tourism and the city from a range of sociological, economic and environmental approaches to fully explore the nature of tourism in cities around the world, bridging both managment and social sicence perspectives. In doing so the book offers students a thorough theoretically informed critical understanding of the totality of the city system in relation to the production and consumption of tourism products and experiences. The book illustrates core principles and issues with a range of international case studies to show theory in practice as well as including illustrations, discussion questions suggestions for further reading and information on useful internet resources to aid understanding and spur critical thought. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Tourism and Cities 2. Living in the City 3. The Sustainable Tourism City 4. Cultures in the Tourist City 5. Selling the Tourist City 6. Political-Economies of the Tourist City 7. Consuming the Tourist City 8. Performing and Experiencing the Tourist City 9. Tourism, Regeneration and Events 10. Conclusion June 2011: 234 x 156: 306pp Hb: 978-0-415-58232-2: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58233-9: £26.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415582339

2009: 234 x 156: 536pp Hb: 978-0-415-45938-9: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45939-6: £29.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86427-2 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415459396

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Tourism and Sustainability

Martin Mowforth and Ian Munt

2008

Paperback

978-0-415-41403-6

£28.99

Hardback

978-0-415-41402-9

£99.00

e-Book

978-0-203-89105-6

Paperback

978-0-415-39955-5

£22.99

Hardback

978-0-415-39954-8

£95.00

e-Book

978-0-203-93762-4

Paperback

978-0-415-37151-3

£21.99

Hardback

978-0-415-37144-5

£79.00

e-Book

978-0-203-93804-1

Hardback

978-0-415-42930-6

£99.00

Paperback

978-0-415-42931-3

£28.99

e-Book

978-0-203-93958-1

Paperback

978-0-415-42366-3

£26.99

Hardback

978-0-415-42364-9

£95.00

e-Book

978-0-203-93440-1

Environment and Tourism

Tourism and Development in the Developing World Ecotourism

Tourism and Responsibility

Andrew Holden

David J. Telfer and Richard Sharpley David A. Fennell

Martin Mowforth, Clive Charlton and Ian Munt

2007

Outdoor Recreation Management John Jenkins and John Pigram

2006

Hardback

978-0-415-36540-6

£120.00

The Geography of Tourism and Recreation

2005

Hardback

978-0-415-33560-7

£110.00

Paperback

978-0-415-33561-4

£31.99

e-Book

978-0-203-42024-9

Paperback

978-0-415-28776-0

£29.99

Hardback

978-0-415-28775-3

£95.00

Tourism Studies and the Social Sciences

C. Michael Hall and Stephen J. Page Andrew Holden

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

2005

tou rism supp le men tary r e ading

Tourism Supplementary Reading Cultural Heritage and Tourism in the Developing World

Forthcoming

Mega Tourist Metropolises

A Regional Perspective

An Introduction to Visual Research Methods in Tourism Edited by Tijana Rakic´, Napier University, UK and Donna Chambers, University of Surrey, UK

Mark Gottiener, University at Buffalo, USA, Tim Simpson, University of Macau, People’s Republic of China and Heiko Schmid, University of Heidelberg, Germany.

Edited by Dallen J. Timothy, Brigham Young University, USA and Gyan P. Nyaupane, Arizona State University, USA Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility Selected Contents: Section 1: Heritage Issues and Challenges in Developing Regions 1. Introduction: Heritage Tourism and the Less-Developed World 2. Protecting the Past: Challenges and Opportunities 3. The Politics of Heritage 4. Heritage Tourism and Its Impacts Section 2: Heritage Issues and Challenges: Regional Perspectives 5. The Meanings, Marketing and Management of Heritage Tourism in South East Asia 6. Heritage and Tourism in East Asia’s Developing Nations: Communist-Socialist Legacies and Diverse Cultural Landscapes 7. Heritage Tourism in the Pacific: Modernity, Myth and Identity 8. South Asian Heritage Tourism: Conflict, Colonialism and Cooperation 9. Heritage Tourism in Southwest Asia and North Africa: Contested Pasts and Veiled Realities 10. Tourism and Africa’s Tripartite Cultural Past 11. Heritage Management and Tourism in the Caribbean 12. Heritage Tourism in Latin America: Can Turbulent Times be Overcome? 13. Heritage Tourism in Central and Eastern Europe 14. Heritage tourism in the Developing World: Reflections and Ramifications 2009: 234 x 156: 280pp Hb: 978-0-415-77621-9: £89.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77622-6: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87775-3 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415776226

Religion and Tourism Crossroads, Destinations and Encounters Michael Stausberg, University of Bergen, Norway This book explores the dynamic interaction between religion and tourism in the modern world. It considers questions such as: • do travellers leave their religion at home when they are touring – and what happens if not? • what are the relationships between tourism and pilgrimage? • what happens to religious performances, places and festivals that function as tourism attractions? Other chapters examine religious theme parks, wellness and spa tourism, the roles played by tourist guides, guidebooks and religious souvenirs, and the role of tourism as a major arena of religious encounters in the contemporary world. Surveying the growing body of work in the field, Michael Stausberg argues that tourism should be a major focus of research within religious studies. Selected Contents: Part 1: Crossroads 1. Affinities 2. Interfaces 3. Pilgrimage and Tourism: Ideal Types and Conflations Part 2: Places and Spaces 4. Religious sites and places 5. Tourist spaces Part 3: Encounters 6. Exposures 7. Performances 8. Mediations 9. Terminal reflections 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-54931-8: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-54932-5: £21.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85478-5 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415549325

Complimentary Exam Copy

Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility

An Introduction to Visual Research Methods in Tourism is the first book to present, discuss and promote the use of a range of visual methods in tourism studies. It introduces methods ranging from the collection of secondary visual materials for the purposes of analysis (such as postcards, tourism brochures, and websites) and the creation of visuals in the context of primary research (such as photography, video and drawings), to the production of data through photo-elicitation techniques. The book promotes thoroughly underpinned interdisciplinary visual tourism research and includes an exploration of many key philosophical, methodological and (inter)disciplinary approaches. Comprised of five parts: Introduction; Paradigms, academic disciplines and theory; Methods; Analysis and Representation; and Conclusion, this volume informs and inspires its readers through a reliance on theory, examples from tourism studies conducted in various geographical locations and through key pedagogical features such as annotated further readings, practical tips boxes and concise chapter summaries. This book will be of interest to experienced visual tourism researchers, scholars wishing to incorporate visual methods in their studies of tourism for the very first time, as well as students on undergraduate, postgraduate or doctoral programmes who are contemplating the incorporation of visual methods in their studies of tourism.

Las Vegas, Dubai and Macau

Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility Mega Tourist Metropolises is the first book to thoroughly examine and compare these three ‘mega’ tourist spaces together in the context of the scale of their respective development for tourism, massive global investment and new urban theories to reveal how they emerge, work and result in massive profits from Tourism. It achieves this by evaluating these landscapes from multidisciplinary perspectives concerned with the economic, political, cultural socio spatial factors that influence the production of these spaces. It analyzes the use of signs and the consumption of these signs to market these places and attract tourists as well as drawing on primary research with tourists in these regions to shed light on why they choose to visit these places and experience they have had. By looking at the urban growth and change in these regions as well as tourism experience it contributes to a greater understanding of these contemporary urban landscapes that extends beyond these geographical locations and will contribute to the development of these spaces in other regions. Selected Contents: 1. Las Vegas, Dubai and Macau 2. Geographical locations 3. Las Vegas 4. Dubai 5. Macau 6. The Architecture of Mega Tourist Spaces 7. Marketing Mega-Tourist Metropolises 8. The Future of Mega – Tourist Spaces and their Relation to Global Capitalism December 2011: 300pp Hb: 978-0-415-55360-5: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55361-2: £25.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415553612

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. Introduction to Visual Methods and Their Use in Tourism Studies Part 2: Paradigms, Academic Disciplines, and Theory 2. Realism vs Relativism and ‘The Visual’ in Studies of Tourism 3. The Discipline and the (in)Discipline of ‘The Visual’ in Tourism Studies Part 3: Methods 4. Collecting Visual Materials From Secondary Sources 5. Mediating Photographs in Interviews and Observations: Photo-elicitation in Tourism Research 6. Visuals as Producing Data and Accessing Embodied Spaces of Tourism Research 7. Creating Visual Materials in the Field: Video 8. Using the Drawing Method in Tourism Research Part 4: Analysis and Representation 9. Reading Visual Material 10. From Content to Context: Methods for Analysing Visual Data 11. Representing ‘The Visual Data’ in Tourism Studies Publications Part 5: Conclusion 12. The Future of Visual Methods in Tourism Studies

View any

product

online using the urls below each listing

July 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57004-6: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57005-3: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85586-7 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415570053

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Tourism, Ethnic Diversity and the City

Edited by Jan Rath

2006

Hardback

978-0-415-33390-0

£90.00

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

tour i s m r e s e arc h mon og r a p h s

Tourism research Monographs Tourism and National Parks International Perspectives on Development, Histories and Change Edited by Warwick Frost, Monash University, Australia and C. Michael Hall, University of Canterbury, New Zealand Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility

Taking a global comparative approach, this book examines how and why national parks have spread and evolved, how they have been fashioned and used, and the integral role of tourism within national parks. The volume’s focus on the long standing connection between tourism and national parks; and the changing concept of national parks over time and space give the book a distinct niche in the national parks and tourism literature. The volume is expected to contribute not only to tourism and national park studies at the upper level undergraduate and graduate levels but also to courses in international and comparative environmental history, conservation studies, and outdoor recreation management.

Selected Contents: New World Perspectives. Old World Perspectives. Developing World: Beyond The Eurocentric. Beyond Nature 2009: 234 x 156: 376pp Hb: 978-0-415-47156-5: £95.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415471565

Tourism Enterprises and Sustainable Development International Perspectives on Responses to the Sustainability Agenda Edited by David Leslie, Glasgow Caledonian University, UK Series: Routledge Advances in Tourism This indispensable contribution provides a comprehensive, state of the art perspective on progress towards the objectives of sustainable development within the tourism sector across the globe by focusing on the environmental performance and adoption of environmental management systems by tourism enterprises. 2009: 229 x 152: 268pp Hb: 978-0-415-99332-6: £70.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415993326

Tourist Mobility and Advanced Tracking Technologies

Tourists, Tourism and the Good Life

Noam Shoval and Michal Isaacson, both at Hebrew University, Israel

Philip Pearce, James Cook University, Australia, Sebastian Filep, Victoria University, Australia and Glenn Ross, James Cook University, Australia

Series: Routledge Advances in Tourism The remarkable developments in tracking technologies over the past decade have opened up a wealth of possibilities in terms of research into tourist spatial behaviour. To date, most research in the field has been based on data derived from less objective – hence methodologically problematic – sources. This book examines the various technologies available to track pedestrians and motorized vehicles as well as the moral, ethical and legal issues arising from the utilization of data thus obtained. The methodologies outlined in the book could prove revolutionary in terms of tourism research, management and planning. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Section 1: Theoretical and Methodological Issues of Tourists’ Spatial Behavior 2. Theoretical Aspects of Tourists’ Spatial Behavior 3. Methodological Aspects of Measurement and Visualization of Tourists’ Spatial Behavior Section 2: Available Tracking Technologies 4. Land-based Tracking Technologies 5. Satellite-based Tracking Technologies Section 3: Application of Tracking Technologies to Research on Tourist Mobility 6. Methodological Challenges 7. Understanding the Tourist 8. Understanding the Destination 9. Ethical Questions and the Tracking of Tourists Section 4: Concluding Thoughts 10. Conclusion. Appendix: Integrating Data Obtained from Tracking Devices into Geographic Information Systems 2009: 229 x 152: 228pp Hb: 978-0-415-96352-7: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415963527

Tourism, Performance and the Everyday Consuming the Orient Michael Haldrup, Lancaster University, UK and Jonas Larsen, Roskilde University, Denmark

Series: Routledge Advances in Tourism

Tourism is arguably one of the largest self-initiated commercial interventions to create well-being and happiness on the entire planet. Yet there is a lack of specific attention to the ways in which we can better understand and evaluate the relationship between well-being and travel. The recent surge of scholarly work in positive psychology concerned with human well-being and flourishing represents a contemporary force with the potential to embellish and augment much current tourism study. This book maps out the field and then draws links between tourists, tourism and positive psychology. It discusses topics such as the issue of excess materialism and its fragile relationship with well-being, the value of positive psychology to lifestyle businesses, and the insights of the research field to spa and wellness tourism. This volume will interest those who study and practise tourism as well as scholars and graduate students in a range of disciplines such as psychology, sociology, business and leisure. Selected Contents: Section 1: Introduction to Section 1 – Principally About Individuals Section 2: Introduction to Section 2 – Individuals and Tourism Contexts 2010: 229 x 152: 242pp Hb: 978-0-415-99329-6: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415993296

New

Tourism and Poverty

Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility

Regina Scheyvens, Massey University, New Zealand

Tourism, Performance and the Everyday carefully analyzes the cultural and social impacts of mass-tourist experiences of ‘exotic’ places on the wider aspects of everyday life. It treats mass-tourism as a cultural phenomenon that feeds into the practices and networks of peoples’ everyday lives rather than as an isolated, trivial or ‘exotic’ event. It traces how these impacts are mediated by various mobilities between home and away through innovate mobile and ethnographic research methods at tourist destinations and the home of tourists. The book contains analysis of diaries, photographs, blogs and photo web sharing sites, participant observation of performing tourists and ‘home ethnographies’ of the afterlife tourist photographs, souvenirs and memories.

Tourism and Poverty addresses a critical question facing many academics, governments, aid agencies, tourism organizations, and conservation bodies around the world: can tourism work as a tool to overcome poverty? This book is the first to present a focused description and critique of the issues surrounding poverty and tourism. Relying on a wealth of primary data on tourism, Regina Scheyvens supports her findings with novel case studies such as innovative partnerships between resorts and fledgling indigenous businesses in Fiji, Oxfam’s work to connect the agriculture and tourism sectors in the Caribbean, and difficulties in alleviating poverty in the Maldives despite the growth of luxury tourism. This book will challenge the way academics and tourism professionals understand the current and potential role of tourism in alleviating poverty.

Selected Contents: 1. Performing Tourism, Performing the Orient 2. De-exoticizing Tourist Travel 3. Following Flows 4. Material Cultures of Tourism 5. Mobilising the Orient 6. Doing Tourism 7. Performing Digital Photography 8. The Afterlife of Tourism 9. Tourism Mobilities and Cosmopolitanism Cultures 2009: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-46713-1: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87393-9 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415467131

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

Series: Routledge Advances in Tourism

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Poverty and Tourism Unpacked 3. Tourism Entrenches Poverty 4. Poverty Attracts Tourists 5. Tourism Reduces Poverty – Tourism Industry Approaches 6. Tourism Reduces Poverty – Government Approaches 7. Tourism Reduces Poverty – Development Agency Approaches 8. Conclusion 2010: 229 x 152: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-99675-4: £70.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415996754

tou rism rese arch mon ographs

Tourist Experience

Forthcoming

Fieldwork in Tourism

Contemporary Perspectives

New Perspectives in Tourism Geographies

Methods, Issues and Reflections

Edited by Richard Sharpley and Philip R. Stone both at University of Central Lancashire, UK Series: Advances in Tourism Tourist Experience provides a focused analysis into tourist experiences that reflect their ever-increasing diversity and complexity, and their significance and meaning to tourists themselves. Written by leading international scholars, it offers new insights into emergent behaviours, motivations and sought meanings on the part of tourists based on five contemporary themes determined by current research activity in tourism experience: dark tourism experiences, experiencing poor places, sport tourism experiences, writing the tourist experience and researching tourist experiences: methodological approaches. Selected Contents: Section 1: Dark Tourism Experiences: Mediating Metween Life and Death Section 2: Experiencing Poor Places: Introduction Section 3: Sport Tourism Experiences: Introduction Section 4: Writing the Tourist Experience: Introduction Section 5: Researching Tourist Experiences: Methodological Approaches September 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-57278-1: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85594-2 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415572781

Forthcoming 2nd Edition

The Critical Turn in Tourism Studies Creating an Academy of Hope Edited by Irena Ateljevic, Wageningen University, the Netherlands, Nigel Morgan, The Welsh Centre for Tourism Research and Annette Pritchard, University of Wales Institute Cardiff and Director of the Welsh Centre for Tourism Research Series: Advances in Tourism The first edition of this book The Critical Turn in Tourism Studies: Innovative Research Methodologies (2007) set out to challenge the neo-liberal discourses which dominate mainstream tourism inquiry. It was comprised of two parts which respectively explored tourism’s changing epistemological and methodological bases. This second edition intends to move the debate forward by exploring how critical tourism inquiry can make a difference in the world, linking tourism education driven by the values of empowerment, partnership and ethics to policy and practice. This timely and thought provoking book which collectively questions tourism’s current and future role in societal development is essential reading for students, researchers and academics interested in Tourism and Hospitality. Selected Contents: Part 1: Critical Tourism Research Part 2: Critical Tourism Education Part 3: Critical Action in ’The Tourism World’ July 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-58552-1: £85.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415585521

Edited by Julie Wilson, University of the West of England, UK Series: Advances in Tourism This volume provides a fresh examination of existing debates by considering disciplinary changes in geography in the context of tourism, in particular, culture and space in terms of encounter, embodiment, [inter]subjectivities, lifestyle and identity, as well as the spatial turn in social sciences more generally. It also looks at how other approaches such as critical, feminist, Marxist and behaviouralist have diversified research in the tourism geographies field. In addition it highlights areas for further research and maps out the dimensions of future advances in the field in different disciplinary, regional and thematic contexts. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Aproaching Tourism Geographies 1. The Cultural Turn in Geography and Tourism 2. Poststructuralism 3. Gender 4. Queering Geographies of Tourism 5. Performativity 6. Postcolonialism 7. Mobilities Part 2: Themes in Tourism Geographies 8. Tourism and the Cultures of Places 9. Lifestyle Migration 10. Environment 11. Rural 12. Creativity 13. Historical 14. Sensuous Geographies 15. Development 16. Urban 17. Time Geography and Tourism 18. Place and Tourism 19. Landscape 20. GIS 21. Conclusion July 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-56857-9: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85974-2

Tourism and Change in Polar Regions

Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility

Fieldwork in Tourism is the first book to focus on this extremely significant component of contemporary tourist research and provides hands on approaches to conducting tourism fieldwork in a range of settings, exploring the methodological considerations and offering strategies to mitigate these. The book also discusses how fieldwork affects researchers personally and what happens to field relationships. Divided into five sections, each with an introduction and a guide to further reading, the chapters cover the context of fieldwork, research relationships, politics and power, the position of the researcher in the field, research methods and processes, including virtual fieldwork, and the relationships between being a tourist and doing fieldwork. The concluding chapter suggests that the link between tourism and fieldwork perhaps offers greater insights into understanding creative fieldwork than may be imagined. Selected Contents: Introducing the Contexts of Fieldwork. Research Relationships: Power, Politics and Patron-client Affinities. Positionality: Researcher Position in the Field, Practicalities, Perils, and Pitfalls. Methods and Processes. Future Directions and New Environments

Climate, Environments and Experiences

September 2010: 234 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-58919-2: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84551-6

Michael C. Hall, University of Canterbury, New Zealand and Jarkko Saarinen, University of Oulu, Finland

Tourism and India

Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility

This timely volume provides a contemporary account of tourism and its impacts in polar regions. It explores the development and prospects of polar tourism, as well as tourism’s impacts and associated change at high latitudes from environmental, economic, social and political perspectives. It draws on cutting edge research from both the Arctic and Antarctic to provide a comparative review and illustrate the real life issues arising from tourism’s role in these regions. Integrating theory and practice the book fully evaluates varying perspectives on polar tourism and proposes actions that could be taken by local and global management to achieve a sustainable future for polar regions and development of tourism. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Context Part 2: Tourism and Change in the Northern Polar Regions Part 3: Tourism and Change in the Southern Polar Regions Part 4: Conclusions and Future July 2010: 234 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-48999-7: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85180-7

Complimentary Exam Copy

Edited by C. Michael Hall, University of Canterbury, New Zealand

A Critical Introduction Kevin Hannam, University of Sunderland, UK and Anya Diekmann, Université Libre de Bruxelles, Belgium Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility Tourism and India is the first book to specifically focus on and fully analyze the issues facing contemporary India both as a destination and a potential source of tourists. The book analyses previous research and applies critical theory to key aspects of tourism in this region and supports this with a wide range of examples to illustrate the key conceptual points. As such the book examines aspects of tourism in India including tourism governance, cultural tourism, heritage tourism, nature-based tourism from the supply side and international tourism, domestic tourism, outbound tourism and the Indian Diaspora from the demand side. Selected Contents: 1. Tourism and India: An Ambivalent Relationship 2. Governing and Promoting Tourism in India 3. Cultural Tourism in India 4. Heritage Tourism in India 5. Nature Based Tourism in India 6. International Travel and Tourism to India 7. Domestic Travel and Tourism in India 8. Tourism Mobilities and India’s Diaspora 9. Concluding Thoughts: A Research Agenda for Tourism and India 2010: 234 x 156: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-55729-0: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415557290

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

tour i s m r e s e arc h mon og r a p h s

New

Forthcoming

Tourism and Agriculture

Tourism in China

Real Tourism

New Geographies of Consumption, Production and Rural Restructuring

Policy and Development Since 1949

Representation, Practice and the ‘Material’ in Contemporary Travel Culture

Edited by Rebecca Maria Torres, University of Texas, Austin, USA and Janet Momsen, University of California, USA Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility Tourism and Agriculture examines regional specific cases at the interface between tourism and agriculture, looking at the impacts of rural restructuring, and new geographies of consumption and production. To meet the need for a more comprehensive appreciation of the relationships and interactions between the tourism and agricultural economic sectors, this book consider the factors that influence the nature of these relationships; and explore avenues for facilitating synergistic relationships between tourism and agriculture. These relationships are examined in thirteen chapters through case studies from eastern and western Europe, Japan and the United States and from the developing countries of the Pacific, the Caribbean and Ghana and Mexico. Themes of diversification, economic development, and emerging new forms of production and consumption, are integrated throughout the entire book. Selected Contents: Section 1: Tourism, Agriculture and Rural Restructuring Section 2: Building Tourism and Agriculture Linkages: Challenges and Potential Section 3: New Forms of Tourism and Agriculture Production and Consumption February 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-58429-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83440-4

New

Tourism and National Identities An International Perspective Edited by Elspeth Frew, La Trobe University, Australia and Leanne White, Victoria University, Australia Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility Tourism and National Identity is the first volume to fully explore the relationship between tourism and national identities and the multiple ways in which cultural tourism, events and celebrations contribute to national identity. It examines core topics critical to understanding this relationship including: tourism branding, stereotyping and national identity; tourism-related representation and experience of national identity; tourism visitation/site/event management; and, the relationship to cultural tourism. The book looks at a range of international tourist sites and events, combines multidisciplinary perspectives and international cases to provide a thorough academic analysis. The interconnecting area of cultural tourism and national identity has been largely overlooked in the academic literature to date. This book gives considerable analysis to the complex relationship between the two domains , and indeed, the multifaceted strategies used to define that relationship.

David Airey, University of Surrey, UK and King Chong, Hong Kong Public Administration Association (HKPAA), China Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility Tourism development is now an essential agenda item for the Chinese government’s plan for economic and social growth. Policy and policy-making for tourism therefore provides the essential background to understand tourism development in China. This is the first book to set the development of tourism in China since 1949 in its policy context. Underpinned by a strong conceptual framework, this systematic study of China contributes to an in-depth understanding of how public policy-making for tourism works and how it affects the development of tourism in the real world. The text explores tourism policy during three distinct leadership periods since creation of the People’s Republic of China in 1949: Mao Zedong (1949–1978); Deng Xiaoping (1978–1997) and the Collective Leadership Era (1997-the present). The attitudes and values of leaders and central government agencies towards tourism are considered, as well as the interactions of ideological orthodoxies, socioeconomic conditions and institutions in their influence on national policy-making and tourism development. A separate chapter is devoted to policy-making in China’s two Special Administrative Regions, Hong Kong and Macau, as well as Taiwan due to its political separation from the Mainland, and Tibet, given its distinctive characteristics. Drawing on China’s experience over sixty years the book concludes with both theoretical and practical implications for tourism policy-making. This timely volume offers important insights into China’s Tourism as well as contributing to a wider pattern of debates about the respective roles of government policy and the market in the past and future. The material draws on exclusive in-depth interviews with key informants in China and on government documents and official sources not generally available in the international literature. This will be of interest to higher level students, academics and researchers within Tourism, Policy studies, Politics, Geography and China Studies. Selected Contents: Part 1: Theoretical and Contextural Background 1. Introduction 2. Context, History and Overview 3. The Conceptual Framework Part 2: Tourism Development and Policy Making in China from 1949 4. Changing National Models of China From 1949 5. Tourism Politics in Mao Zedong’s Era 6. The National Policy-Makers 7. Deng Xiaoping’s Era: a period of change 8. The Collective Leadership Era Part 3: China’s Special Territories 9. Tourism Policy Issues in China’s Special Territories Part 4: Theoretical and Practical Implications 10. Theoretical Implications 11. Experiences and Lessons

Edited by Claudio Minca, Royal Holloway University of London, UK and Tim Oakes, University of Colorado at Boulder, USA Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility Over the past decade tourism studies has broken out of its traditional institutional affiliation with business and management programs to take its legitimate place as an interdisciplinary social science field of cutting edge scholarship. The field has emerged as central to ongoing debates in social theory concerning such diverse topics as postcolonialism, mobility, and postmodernism, to name just a few. While there has been a diverse body of empirical research on this transformation the theoretical discussions in tourism studies remain largely attached to theories of modernity and Anglo-centric assumptions about tourism. There is a need for the field to come to terms theoretically with the contemporary and future realities of tourism as a truly global phenomenon. This significant volume seeks to set the theoretical agenda, engaging directly with what tourism does in practice and in place and demonstrate the need for a theoretical intervention that moves tourism scholarship beyond the province of Anglophone thinking. The volume achieves this by explicitly bridging ‘western’ and ‘non-western’ scholarship on tourism; reframing theoretical discussions around ‘real practices’ instead of abstract typologies; and radically delinking tourism theory from the grand narratives of modernity and assumptions about authenticity, identity, tradition, and development. The book brings together leading academics in the field and provides provocative multidisciplinary and multi-contextual reflection on the future of tourism. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: The Trouble with Tourism and the Modern 2. The Trouble with Tourism and the Modern 3. Touring Modernities and the Questions of Order Part 2: Theorising Practice in Tourism 4. Rural Modernities and the Question of Time 5. Real Bodies at Work in Tourism 6. Tourism Figures: Thinking Through the Crowd in the Age of Banal Mobility 7. Layovers in Modernity Part 3: Real Tourism 8. Real Spaces of Consumption: Alternative Modernities in Dubai and Singapore 9. Post-ethical Tours: The Practice of Social Responsibility in Tourism 10. Post-war Tours 11. Tourism and the Question of Poverty 12. Post-European Landscapes: Tourism, Practice and the Japanese Gaze 13. Conclusion October 2011: 234 x 156: 306pp Hb: 978-0-415-58224-7: £85.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415582247

April 2011: 234 x 156: 344pp Hb: 978-0-415-54809-0: £85.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415548090

Selected Contents: Section 1: Identity and Image Section 2: Culture and Community Section 3: Heritage and History March 2011: 234 x 156: 248pp Hb: 978-0-415-57277-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85596-6

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

Recommend key titles to your librarian today! Ensure that your library has access to all the latest publications. Visit www.routledge.com/info/librarian.asp today and complete our online Library Recommendation Form.

tou rism rese arch mon ographs

Forthcoming

Last Chance Tourism Edited by Raynald Harvey Lemelin, Lakehead University, Canada, Jackie Dawson, University of Guelph, Canada and Emma Stewart, Lincoln University, New Zealand Series: Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility Concerns over vanishing destinations such as the Great Barrier Reef, the Everglades of Florida, the ice cap on Mt. Kilimanjaro, and the Maldives have prompted some travel operators and tour agencies to recommend these destinations to consumers before they disappear. This travel trend has been reported as: ‘disappearing tourism,’ ‘doom tourism,’ and most commonly ‘last-chance tourism’ where tourists explicitly seek vanishing landscapes or seascapes, and/or disappearing natural and/or social heritage. However, despite this increasing form of travel there has been little examination in the academic literature of last-chance tourism phenomenon. This is the first book to empirically examine and evaluate this contemporary tourism development providing a new angle on the effects of global change and pressures of visitation on tourism destinations. It aims to develop the conceptual definition of last-chance tourism, examine the ethics surrounding this type of travel, and provide case studies highlighting this form of tourism in different regions. In particular it critically reviews the advantages of publicizing these vulnerable destinations to raise awareness and promote conservation efforts, but also the issue of attracting more tourists seeking to undergo such experiences before they are gone forever, accelerating the negative impacts. It further examines current trends, discusses escalating challenges, and highlight future opportunities. This timely volume is multi-authored, multi-disciplinary featuring some of the leading researchers in the fields of leisure, tourism, anthropology, geography, and sociology and draws on international range of case studies. It will be of interest to students, researchers and academics interested in Tourism, Environmental Studies and Development Studies. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction: Defining Last-Chance Tourism 1. Introduction Part 2: Disappearing Landscapes/Seascapes & Vanishing Fauna 2. Disappearing Islands and Rising Sea Levels: Making the Best of Tourism on the Short-Term 3. Coral Bleaching and the Great Barrier Reef: Visiting Threatened Areas 4. Disappearing Marine System: Vanishing Marine Wildlife 5. Vanishing Fauna: The Changing Wildlife Tourism Opportunities in Safaris and Bird Watching 6. Tourism in Alpine Environments: Planning for Changing Snow and Ice Conditions 7. The Changing Arctic 8. The Changing Antarctic 9. Walking in a Winter Wonderland? The Melting Legacy of Ice Castles and Winter Tourism Part 3: Ethics, Policy and Governance Dimensions 10. Considering the Ethical Dimensions of Last-Chance Tourism 11. The Political Dimensions of Last-Chance Tourism and Climate Change 12. Recognizing the Socio-Cultural Dimensions of LCT: Visiting The Resting Places of Inuit and European Settlers in the Torngat Mountains National Park 13. Climate-Change Ambassadors: Takers and Leavers 14. Last-Chance Tourism: Some Good News for a Change 15. Conclusion

Development Studies Textbooks Geographies of Developing Areas The Global South in a Changing World Glyn Williams and Paula Meth both at University of Sheffield, UK and Katie Willis, Royal Holloway, University of London, UK

This significant new textbook questions traditional conceptions of Africa, Asia, Latin America, and the Caribbean to provide a new understanding of the ‘Global South’, highlighting the rich diversity of regions that are usually only viewed in terms of their ‘problems’.

Providing a positive but critical approach to a number of key issues affecting these important areas, the book: • examines the ways in which the Global South is represented, and the values at play

November 2011: 234 x 156: 248pp Hb: 978-0-415-61823-6: £80.00

• explores how the South is shaping, and being shaped by, global economic, political and cultural processes

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415618236

• looks at peoples’ lives and identities • assesses the possibilities and limitations of different ‘development’ strategies.

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

European Forest Recreation and Tourism

Edited by Simon Bell, Murray Simpson, Lisa Tyrväinen, Tuija Sievänen and Ulrike Pröbstl

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-44363-0

£55.00

e-Book

978-0-203-87207-9

World Tourism Cities

Edited by Robert Maitland and Peter Newman

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-45198-7

£90.00

Tourism at the Grassroots

Edited by John Connell and Barbara Rugendyke

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-40555-3

£95.00

Tourism, Creativity and Development

Edited by Greg Richards 2007 and Julie Wilson

Hardback

978-0-415-42756-2

£95.00

Tourism and the Consumption of Wildlife

Edited by Brent Lovelock

2007

Hardback

978-0-415-40381-8

£95.00

Ecotourism, NGOs and Development

Jim Butcher

2007

Hardback

978-0-415-39367-6

£90.00

Complimentary Exam Copy

A timely assessment of the way global processes are perceived from the Global South, the book is illustrated with over sixty colour photographs. It includes a full glossary of key terms, case studies from fieldwork conducted across a range of communities and nations, and introductions to the wider literature in this field. This is a wonderful new textbook for all students interested in Human Geography and Development Studies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Section 1: Representing the South 2. Representing the South Section 2: The South in a Global World 3. The South in a Changing World Order 4. The South in a Globalising Economy 5. Social and Cultural Change in the South Section 3: Living in the South 6. Political Lives 7. Making a Living 8. Ways of Living Section 4: Making a Difference 9. Governing Development 10. Market-Led Development 11. DIY Development 12. Conclusions 2009: 246 x 189: 464pp Hb: 978-0-415-38123-9: £99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-38122-2: £31.99 eBook: 978-0-203-08624-7 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415381222

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

dev e lop me n t s tudi e s te x tbo o k s

3rd Edition

Green Development Environment and Sustainability in a Developing World W.M. Adams

The third edition of Green Development retains the clear and powerful argument of previous editions, but has been updated to reflect advances in ideas and changes in international policy. Greater attention has been given to political ecology, environmental risk and the environmental impacts of development.

Selected Contents: 1. The Dilemma of Sustainability 2. The Roots of Sustainable Development 3. The Development of Sustainable Development 4. Sustainable Development: Making the Mainstream 5. Mainstream Sustainable Development 6. Delivering Mainstream Sustainable Development 7. Countercurrents in Sustainable Development 8. Dryland Political Ecology 9. Sustainable Forests? 10. The Politics of Preservation 11. Sustainability and River Control 12. Industrial and Urban Hazard 13. Green Development: Reformism or Radicalism? 2008: 234 x 156: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-39507-6: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39508-3: £28.99 eBook: 978-0-203-92971-1 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415395083

Forthcoming

Politics of Development A Survey Heloise Weber, University of Queensland, Australia

A unique guide to the politics surrounding development in countries around the world. This new title presents a wealth of information covering the global politics of development. Includes: • in-depth essays profiling the critical topics • an A-Z of key terms • maps detailing water consumption and distribution • statistical tables.

August 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-500-9: £130.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781857435009

Forthcoming

Routledge Perspectives on Development

4th Edition

An Introduction to Sustainable Development

Edited by Tony Binns

Jennifer Elliott, University of Brighton, UK

The Routledge Perspectives on Development series provides an invaluable, up-to-date and refreshing approach to key development issues for academics and students working in the field of development, in disciplines such as anthropology, economics, geography, international relations, politics and sociology. New 2nd Edition

Theories and Practices of Development Katie Willis, Royal Holloway, University of London, UK

Theories and Practices of Development provides a clear and user-friendly introduction to the complex debates around how development has been understood and achieved. The second edition has been fully updated and expanded to reflect global political and economic shifts, as well as new approaches to development. The rise of China and India is given particular attention, as is the global economic crisis and its implications for development theories and practice. There are new sections on faith-based development, and the development dimensions of climate change, as well as greater engagement with development theories as they are put into practice in the Global North. The book deals with the evolution of development ideas and policies, focusing on economic, political, social, environmental and spatial dimensions. It highlights how development cannot be considered as a neutral concept, but is entwined with inequalities in power at local, as well as national and global scales. The use of boxed examples, tables and illustrations helps students understand complex theoretical ideas and also demonstrates how development theories are put into practice in the real world. Each chapter ends with a summary section, discussion topics, suggestions for further reading and website resources.

This substantially revised fourth edition continues to provide an introduction to sustainable development with particular reference to what it means for and within countries of the developing world. The book focuses on highlighting the inter-dependent environment and development challenges faced by these countries and how these are shaped by policies and measures associated with an evolving global sustainable development agenda. Early sections of the book examine the origins of the term and how issues of environmental management, economic development and social justice are now understood as the interlinked, global challenges of sustainable development. Subsequent sections explore recent changes in the policies and mechanisms of organizations at various scales across the arenas of trade, aid, debt, environmental agreements and foreign investment for example, illustrating the complex and contested challenges of sustainable development in practice. Further chapters focus on insights to sustainable development that emerge from within rural and urban contexts of the Global South. A final chapter considers how these changes can be understood and assessed. Principal changes from the third edition include new content incorporating in particular; the rapid economic growth in China and India and the implications in terms of raw materials and new markets, the prospective impacts of global recession for rethinking development strategies and for lower carbon futures (to include the contribution of ecological economics to the sustainable development debates), and greater insights of evidence for sustainable developments based on practice and cases from within the developing world. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. What is Sustainable Development? 2. The Challenges of Sustainable Development 3. Action Towards Sustainable Development 4. Sustainable Rural Livelihoods 5. Sustainable Urban Livelihoods 6. Sustainable Development in the Developing World: An assessment November 2011: 234 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-59072-3: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-59073-0: £21.99 eBook: 978-0-203-84417-5 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415590730

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: What Do We Mean by Development? 2. Modernization, Keynesianism and Neoliberalism 3. Structuralism, Neo-Marxism and Socialism 4. Grassroots Development 5. Social and Cultural Dimensions of Development 6. Environment and Development Theory 7. Globalization and Development: Problems and Solutions? 8. Conclusion February 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-59070-9: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-59071-6: £22.99 eBook: 978-0-203-84418-2 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415590716

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

Complimentary Exam Copies Titles marked with this icon are available as complimentary exam copies for lecturers or faculty considering them for course adoption. Visit the URL to obtain your print or electronic copy.

d evelo pm e n t studies te x tboo k s

Water Resources and Development

Economics and Development Studies

Forthcoming

Clive Agnew and Philip Woodhouse both at University of Manchester, UK

Michael Tribe, University of Bradford, UK, Frederick Nixson, University of Manchester, UK and Andy Sumner, Institute of Development Studies, Sussex, UK

Liz Young, Staffordshire University, UK

Since the start of the twenty-first century there has been an unprecedented focus upon water as a key factor in the future of both society and environment. Water management lies at the heart of strategies of development as does the added the hazard of climate change.

Water Resources and Development provides a stimulating interdisciplinary introduction to the role of water resources in shaping opportunities and constraints for development. The book begins by charting the evolution of approaches to water management. It identifies an emerging polarization in the late twentieth century between ‘technical’ and ‘social’ strategies. In the past decade these two axes of policy debate have been further intersected by discussion of the scale at which management decisions should be made: the relative effectiveness of ‘global’ and ‘local’ governance of water. A variety of case studies elaborate this analytical framework, exemplifying four key development challenges: economic growth, poverty reduction, competition and conflict over water, and adaptation to climate change. Current ‘best practice’ for water management is examined, addressing strategies of water supply augmentation, the ecological implications of intensified use, and strategies of demand management guided by economic or political principles. It is argued defining ‘successful’ water management and best practice requires first the establishment of development goals and the implicit trade-offs between water consumption and conservation. This engaging and insightful text offers a unique interdisciplinary analysis by integrating scientific, engineering, social and political perspectives. This is an essential text for courses on development studies, geography, earth sciences and the environment. Selected Contents: 1. Water Management Best Practice in the Twenty-First Century 2. Economic Growth, Environmental Limits and Increasing Water Demand 3. Climate Change and Fresh Water Resources 4. Water Resources in Colonial and Post-Independence Agricultural Development 5. Water Supply 6. Water Demand 7. Catchments and Conflicts 8. Water Management. Conclusions 2010: 234 x 156: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-45137-6: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45139-0: £22.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415451390

View any

product

online using the urls below each listing

Complimentary Exam Copy

Development studies textbooks and courses have sometimes tended to avoid significant economic content. However, without an understanding of the economic aspects of international development many of the more complex issues cannot be fully comprehended. Economics and Development Studies makes the economic dimension of discourse around controversial issues in international development accessible to second and third year undergraduate students working towards degrees in development studies. This book synthesizes existing development economics literature in order to identify the salient issues and controversies and make them accessible and understandable. The concern is to distinguish differences within the economics profession, and between economists and non-economists, so that the reader can make informed judgments about the sources of these differences, and about their impact on policy analysis and policy advice. The book features explanatory text boxes, tables and diagrams, suggestions for further reading, and a listing of the economic concepts used in the chapters. Selected Contents: 1. Development Economics and Development Studies 2. The Nature of Development Economics 3. Economic Growth and Structural Change 4. Economic Growth and Developing Countries 5. Economic Growth and Economic Development Since 1960 6. The Global Economy and the Third World 7. Developing Countries and International Trade 8. Economics and Development Policy 9. Poverty, Inequality and Development Economists 10. Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-45039-3: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45038-6: £24.99

Food and Development Series: Routledge Perspectives on Development Some people have too little food and die as a consequence, some people have too much food and die from associated diseases, and some methods of food production create social dislocation and deadly environments where biodiversity is eroded and pollution is rampant. Food, how it is produced, distributed and consumed has more salience at the international level than ever before. While guaranteeing enough food for the world’s inhabitants continues to be a serious challenge, new issues about food have emerged that are causing concerns. New problems, associated with the increased levels of obesity, contentious agricultural trading regimes and the environmental sustainability of our contemporary food system are all high on international agendas. This text analyses these diverse food related problems, namely: the continued prevalence of mass under nutrition in the developing world; acute food crises in some places associated with conflict; the emergence of over nutrition in the developing world and the vulnerability of the contemporary global food production system. The most important of these issues are explored with particular reference to their implications for the majority of the world’s population who live in what was traditionally categorised as the ‘developing world’. The text identifies the major problems and analyses factors at the international, national and local scales to understand their continued prevalence. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction and Historical Overview 2. The Contemporary Nature and Extent of Food Related and Mortality and Morbidity 3. Theoretical Perspectives: Understanding Deadly Diets 4. Globalisation and Food 5. National Perspectives and Food 6. Sub National Perspectives 7. Gendered Fields 8. Humanitarian Crises 9. The Future: Policies and Strategies December 2011: 234 x 156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-49799-2: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49800-5: £20.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87748-7 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415498005

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415450386

Forthcoming

Africa Diversity and Development Tony Binns, University of Otago, New Zealand, Alan Dixon, University of Worcester, UK and Etienne Nel, University of Otago, New Zealand At the start of the twenty-first century, Africa is the world’s poorest continent. This book will both introduce and de-mystify Africa’s diversity and dynamism, and consider how its peoples and environments have interacted through time and space. The background and diversity of Africa’s social, cultural, economic, political and environmental systems will be examined, and the book will identify and elucidate the key development issues which have affected Africa in the past and are likely to be significant in shaping the future of the continent. These will include; the impact of HIV/AIDS, sources of conflict and post-conflict reconstruction, the state and governance, the nature of African economies in a global context, and future development trajectories. Selected Contents: 1. Africa: Continuity and Change 2. Africa’s People 3. African Environments 4. Rural Africa 5. Urban Africa 6. Health 7. Conflict and Post-conflict Africa 8. African Economies 9. Developing Africa 10. What Future for Africa? November 2011: 234 x 156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-41367-1: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41368-8: £20.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415413688

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

dev e lop me n t s tudi e s te x tbo o k s

2nd Edition

Gender and Development Janet Momsen, University of California, USA

This revised and updated second edition provides a concise, accessible introduction to Gender and Development issues in the developing world and in the transition countries of Eastern and Central Europe. The nine chapters include discussions on: changes in theoretical approaches, gender complexities and the Millennium Development Goals; social and biological reproduction including differing attitudes to family planning by states and variation in education and access to housing; differences in health and violence at major life stages for women and men and natural disasters and gender roles in rural and urban areas. The penultimate chapter considers the impact of broad economic changes such as the globalization of trade and communications on gender differences in economic activity and the final chapter addresses international progress towards gender equality as measured by the global gender gap. The text is particularly strong on environmental aspects and the new edition builds on this to consider the effects of climate change and declining natural resources illustrated by a case study of changing gender roles in fishing in India. There is also enhanced coverage of topics such as global trade, sport as a development tool, masculinities, and sustainable agriculture. Maps, statistics, references and boxed case studies have been updated throughout and their coverage widened. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Gender is a Development Issue 2. Demography and Migration 3. Reproduction 4. Gender, Health and Violence 5. Gender and Environment 6. Gender in Rural Areas 7. Gender and Urbanization 8. Globalization and Changing Patterns of Economic Activity 9. How Far Have We Come? 2009: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-77562-5: £89.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77563-2: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86962-8 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415775632

Cities and Development

Conflict and Development

Jo Beall and Sean Fox both at London School of Economics, UK

Roger MacGinty, University of York, UK and Andrew Williams, University of St. Andrews, UK

Cities and Development provides a critical exploration of the dynamic relationship between urbanism and development. Highlighting both the challenges and opportunities associated with rapid urban change, the book surveys: • the historical relationship between urbanization and development • the role cities play in fostering economic growth in a globalizing world

• the unique characteristics of urban poverty and the poor record of interventions designed to tackle it • the complexities of managing urban environments; issues of urban crime, violence, war and terrorism in contemporary cities • the importance of urban planning, governance and politics in shaping city futures. This book brings into conversation debates from urban and development studies and highlights the strengths and weaknesses of current policy and planning responses to the contemporary urban challenge. It includes research orientated supplements in the form of summaries, boxed case studies, development questions and further reading. The book is intended for senior undergraduate and graduate students interested in urban, international and development studies, as well as policy-makers and planners concerned with equitable and sustainable urban development. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Development in the First Urban Century 2. Urbanisation and Development in Historical Perspective 3. Urbanism and Economic Development 4. Urban Poverty and Vulnerability 5. Managing the Urban Environment 6. Human Security in Cities: Crime, Violence, War and Terrorism 7. Shaping City Futures: Urban Planning, Governance and Politics

This valuable introductory text explains, reviews and critically evaluates this complex relationship. It focuses on intra-state conflicts and complex political emergencies that combine transnational and internal characteristics. Attention is also given to inter-state conflicts. Chapters emphasize how the relationship between conflict and development traverses many scales (macro, meso and micro) and dimensions (economic, political and cultural). Furthermore it explains how different developmental challenges and opportunities emerge along the full life-cycle of conflict. Specifically, the role of poverty, state, market, civil society, globalization, humanitarian aid, refuges, gender and health within conflict dynamics are examined. The book also investigates specific developmental issues emerging during conflict management and post conflict reconstruction. Both authors have a background in conducting research in deeply divided societies, and argue that many of the processes connected with war and peace making deliberately write people out of the equation. This book attempts to ‘write people in’. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Poverty, Profit and the Political Economy of Violent Conflict 2. Institutions: Hardware and Software 3. People: Participation, Civil Society and Gender 4. Conflict Resolution, Transformation, Reconciliation and Development 5. Post-Conflict Reconstruction and Development 6. Development, Aid and Violent Conflict. Conclusion 2009: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-39936-4: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39937-1: £21.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415399371

2009: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-39098-9: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39099-6: £21.99 eBook: 978-0-203-08645-2 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415390996

Non-Governmental Organizations and Development David Lewis, London School of Economics, UK and Nazneen Kanji, International Institute for Environment and Development, London, UK Non-governmental organizations (NGOs) are high profile actors in the field of international development, both as providers of services to vulnerable individuals and communities and as campaigning policy advocates. This book provides a critical introduction to the wide-ranging topic of NGOs and development. Written by two authors with more than twenty years experience of research and practice in the field, the book combines a critical overview of the main research literature with a set of up-to-date theoretical and practical insights drawn from experience in Asia, Europe, Africa and elsewhere. It highlights the importance of NGOs in development, but it also engages fully with the criticisms that the increased profile of NGOs in development now attracts. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: What are Non-Governmental Organizations? 2. Understanding NGOs in Historical Context 3. NGOs and Development Theory 4. NGOs and Development Practice: From Alternative to Mainstream? 5. NGO Roles in Development 6. NGOs and ‘Civil Society’ 7. NGOs and Globalization 8. NGOs and the Aid System 9. NGOs and International Humanitarian Action 10. Development NGOs in Perspective 2009: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-45429-2: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45430-8: £21.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87707-4 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415454308

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

d evelo pm e n t studies te x tboo k s

Disaster and Development Andrew E. Collins, Northumbria University, UK

This engaging and accessible text illuminates the complexity of the relationship between disaster and development. It opens with an assessment of the scope of contemporary disaster and development studies, highlighting the rationale for looking at the two issues as part of the same topic. The second and third chapters detail development perspectives of disaster, and the influence of disaster on development. The fourth chapter exemplifies how human health is both a cause and consequence of disaster and development and the following chapter illustrates some of the learning and planning processes in disaster and development oriented practice. Early warning, risk management, mitigation, response and recovery actions provide the focus for the fifth and sixth chapters. The final chapter indicates some of the likely future contribution and challenges of combined disaster and development approaches. With an emphasis on putting people at the centre of disaster and development, the book avoids confronting readers with ‘no hope’ representations, instead highlighting disaster reduction opportunities.

Population and Development

Postcolonialism and Development

W.T.S. Gould, University of Liverpool, Cheryl McEwan, University of Durham

Cheryl McEwan

Population and Development addresses important issues at the heart of the problems of developing countries. How these countries address the common difficulties of population growth, including mortality and fertility decline, population redistribution including internal migration and urbanization, and also international migration, for both source countries and for destination countries. How and why has population change affected development – both positively and negatively? How and why has development affected population change – both growth and distribution? The arguments of the book bring together a large but fairly loosely integrated literature from population studies, development studies and geography in a conceptually coordinated, empirically wide-ranging and challenging discussion. It is targeted at an audience in undergraduate courses in Geography and in Masters courses in Development Studies and Population Studies. The books succinct but erudite structure means it can be used either as a course text book, or as a basic reference on a range of current issues and likely concerns at the interface between Geography, Development Studies and Population Studies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Why Disaster and Development? 2. Viewing Disasters from Perspectives of Development 3. How Disasters Influence Development 4. Physical and Mental Health in Disaster and Development 5. Learning and Planning in Disaster Management 6. Disaster Early Warning and Risk Management 7. Disaster Migration, Response and Recovery 8. Conclusions

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Population and Development 2. How Population Affects Development 3. How Development Affects Population 4. Mortality, Disease and Development 5. Fertility, Culture and Development 6. Migration and Development 7. Population Age Structures and Development 8. Human Resource Development 9. Population Planning 10. Global Population Futures

2009: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-42667-1: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42668-8: £21.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87923-8

2008: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-35446-2: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-35447-9: £22.99 eBook: 978-0-203-00105-9

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415426688

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415354479

Postcolonialism and Development explains, reviews and critically evaluates recent debates about postcolonial approaches and their implications for development studies. By outlining contemporary theoretical debates and examining their implications for how the developing world is thought about, written about and engaged with in policy terms, this book unpacks the difficult, complex and important aspects of the relationship between postcolonial approaches and development studies, making them accessible, interesting and relevant to both students and researchers. Each chapter builds an understanding of postcolonial approaches, their historical divergences from development studies and more recent convergences around issues such as discourses of development, knowledge, and power and agency within development. Up-to-date illustrations and examples from across the regions of the world bring to life important theoretical and conceptual issues. This topical book outlines an agenda for theory and practice within postcolonial development studies and illustrates how, while postcolonialism and development pose significant mutual challenges, both are potentially enriched by each others insights and approaches. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Origins of Postcolonialism 3. Postcolonial Theory and Development 4. Discourses of Development and the Power of Representation 5. Development Knowledge and Power 6. Agency in Development 7. Towards a Postcolonial Development Agenda 8. Conclusions 2008: 234 x 156: 376pp Hb: 978-0-415-43364-8: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43365-5: £21.99 eBook: 978-0-203-88738-7 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415433655

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

The Development Reader

Edited by Sharad Chari and Stuart Corbridge

2008

Paperback

978-0-415-41505-7

£32.99

Hardback

978-0-415-41504-0

£120.00

Paperback

978-0-415-38152-9

£21.99

Hardback

978-0-415-38416-2

£84.00

Paperback

978-0-415-37609-9

£26.99

Hardback

978-0-415-37608-2

£89.00

e-Book

978-0-203-96757-7

Paperback

978-0-415-28769-2

£22.99

Hardback

978-0-415-28768-5

£95.00

e-Book

978-0-203-64404-1

Paperback

978-0-415-25871-5

£21.99

Hardback

978-0-415-25870-8

£84.00

e-Book

978-0-203-64627-4

Paperback

978-0-415-28084-6

£22.99

Hardback

978-0-415-28083-9

£84.00

e-Book

978-0-203-49548-3

Southeast Asian Development An Everyday Geography of the Global South

Children, Youth and Development

Rural-Urban Interaction in the Developing World

Environmental Management and Development

Complimentary Exam Copy

Andrew McGregor Jonathan Rigg

Nicola Ansell

Kenny Lynch

Chris Barrow

2008 2007

2004

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

dev e lop me n t s tudi e s s upp l e me n tary r e ad i n g

Development Studies Supplementary Reading Forthcoming

Managing in Developing Countries Betty Jane Punnett, University of the West Indies, Barbados The global business world appears to be changing and there is an ever greater focus on developing countries. This changing international business environment is not reflected in the range of management textbooks currently available. Managing in Developing Countries introduces the core management themes, issues and controversies using examples from developing countries throughout the world. The book covers key concepts, such as: • industrialization • strategic management • pperations management • HRM • leadership • corporate social responsibility. Students taking classes requiring an understanding of management concepts will find Betty Jane Punnett’s book adds serious value. It could be used as core reading for a range of classes, including international business, management, development studies and managing in a developing country. Selected Contents: 1. The Current International Business Environment 2. Understanding Developing Countries 3. Management and Developing Countries 4. Industrialization and Management 5. Strategic Management and Developing Countries 6. Operational Management and Developing Countries 7. Human Resource Management and Developing Countries 8. Leadership and Motivation in Developing Countries 9. Control Issues and Developing Countries 10. Corporate Social Responsibility and Developing Countries 11. Strategic Alliances and Developing Countries 12. Global Niche Management 13. Regional and Global Considerations

New

Water for Food in a Changing World Edited by Alberto Garrido, Research Centre for the Management of Agricultural and Environmental Risks (CEIGRAM), Spain; Technical University of Madrid (UPM), Spain; Marcelino Botin Foundation – Water Observatory (FMB-WO), Spain and Helen Ingram, University of California at Irvine, USA and Professor Emerita at the University of California, USA. Series: Contributions from the Rosenberg International Forum on Water Policy Our thirst for water grows with our population, but the amount of fresh water available on Earth is fixed. If we assume ’business as usual’ by 2050 about forty per cent of the projected global population of 9.4 billion is expected to be facing water stress or scarcity. This book explores water and food production at global and regional scales. The collection offers a comprehensive discussion of all relevant issues, and offers a wide-ranging discussion with the aim of contributing to the global debate about water and food crises. Selected Contents: Preface Part 1: Introduction 1. Water for Food in a Changing World Part 2: Innovations in Agricultural Response to Sustainability Challenge 2. Optimising Water Productivity in Food Production 3. Modern Agricultural under Stress: Lessons from the Murray Darling in Australia 4. Integrated Watershed Management 5. Lessons from Spain: a Critical of Assessment of the Role of Science and Society Part 3: Counting the Drops and the Mouths to Feed: Food Production and Trade 6. Integrating Agricultural Water Use with the Global Water Budget 7. Globalisation of Water through Virtual Water Trade Part 4: Water for the Environment 8. Balancing Water for People and Nature 9. Optimising Water for Life Part 5: Revitalized Water Governance 10. Water Science and Policy in a Changing World: Implications of Non-Stationary Hydrology, Ecolomics and Politics 11. Promises Under Construction: The Evolving Paradigm for Water Governance and the Case of Northern Mexico 12. Beyond Universal Remedies for Good Water Governance: A Political and Contextual Approach 13. Water Policies in Spain: Balancing Water for Food and Water for Nature Part 6: Conclusions 14. Can the World Feed itself Sustainably? April 2011: 234 x 156: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-61911-0: £90.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415619110

November 2011: 246 x 189: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-59068-6: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-59069-3: £34.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415590693

Development and Globalization A Marxian Class Analysis David F. Ruccio, University of Notre Dame, USA Series: Economics as Social Theory Since the mid-1980s, David F. Ruccio has been developing a new framework of Marxian class analysis and applying it to various issues in socialist planning, Third World development, and capitalist globalization. The aim of this collection is to show, through a series of concrete examples, how Marxian class analysis can be used to challenge existing modes of thought and to produce new insights about the problems of capitalist development and the possibilities of imagining and creating noncapitalist economies. The book consists of fifteen essays, plus an introductory chapter situating the author’s work in a larger intellectual and political context. The topics covered range from planning theory to the role of the state in the Nicaraguan Revolution, from radical theories of underdevelopment to the Third World debt crisis, and from a critical engagement with regulation theory to contemporary discussions of globalization and imperialism. Selected Contents: Foreword Stephen Resnick and Richard Wolff Introduction 1. Rethinking Planning, Globalization, and Development from a Marxian Perspective Planning 2. Essentialism and Socialist Economic Planning: A Methodological Critique of Optimal Planning Theory 3. Planning and Class in Transitional Societies 4. The State and Planning in Nicaragua 5. Nicaragua: The State, Class, and Transition Development 6. Radical Theories of Development: Frank, the Modes of Production School, and Amin 7. The Costs of Austerity in Nicaragua: The Worker-Peasant Alliance, 1979-1987 8. When Failure Becomes Success: Class and the Debate over Stabilization and Adjustment 9. Power and Class: The Contribution of Radical Approaches to Debt and Development 10. Capitalism and Industrialization in the Third World: Recognizing the Costs and Imagining Alternatives 11. ‘After’ Development: Reimagining Economy and Class 12. Reading Harold: Class Analysis, Capital Accumulation, and the Role of the Intellectual Globalization 13. Fordism on a World Scale: International Dimensions of Regulation 14. Class Beyond the Nation-State 15. Global Fragments: Subjectivity and Class Politics in Discourses of Globalization 16. Globalization and Imperialism 2010: 234 x 156: 424pp Hb: 978-0-415-77225-9: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77226-6: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415772266

View Inside Routledge Books

Did you know that many of our books now have “View Inside” functionality that allows you to browse online content before making any purchasing decisions? For more information visit www.routledge.com.

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

d evelo pm e n t studies supp le me n tary r e adi n g

The Economics of Industrial Development John Weiss, University of Bradford, UK The spread of the manufacturing industry is an important part of economic development, creating jobs, new products and trade and investment links between countries. Understanding this process is an important part of understanding how countries develop and how they are affected by current globalization. The economic geography of the world has been changing significantly in the last few decades with old established industrial centres in the developed countries in decline, and new centres emerging in countries that were once thought of as poor and still developing. However, this process has been very uneven with some parts of the developing world still largely non-industrial. This book aims to explain this process from the perspective of developing countries. It charts current trends in industrial development drawing on available statistics and explores different perspectives on the role the manufacturing industry can play. The book covers topics including: • aspects of trade policy as they affect industry • the international rules of the World Trade Organisation • the network of links between firms in different parts of the world economy. Separate chapters examine: • the special role of small firms and of technology in industrialisation • government policy towards the encouragement of industry, drawing particularly on the experience of economies in East Asia (the original Asian Tigers) • recent developments in China and India and their implications for other countries. The book draws on simple concepts of economic theory but avoids a technical mathematical approach and should be accessible to a wide audience. It extends and updates the author’s earlier work on industrialisation published by Routledge (Industry in Developing Countries, 1990 and Industrialisation and Globalisation, 2002) and aims to present a comprehensive overview of these important contemporary issues. The book is suitable for both undergraduate and graduate level courses, but will also be invaluable to professionals working in development. Selected Contents: 1. Industry and Development 2. Engine of Growth 3. Trade and Efficiency 4. Globalisation and Industrialisation 5. Technology and Industrialisation 6. Small Scale Industry: Sink or Seedbed? 7. Industrial Policy and the East Asian Miracle 8. Giants Awakened: India and China 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-47371-2: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47372-9: £39.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415473729

Proposals If you have an idea for a new book in the area please contact us using the details found at the front of the catalog. For guidance on how to structure your proposal please visit:

www.routledge.com/info/authors

New

Latin American Economic Development W. Charles Sawyer, Texas Christian University, USA and Javier A. Reyes, University of Arkansas, USA This textbook addresses the economic problems of Latin America theme by theme. The first four centuries of Latin American economic development are explained with reference to historical and institutional factors; the role of commodities; import substitution industrialization; and the resultant slow growth of the region. The development of Latin America during the twentieth century is examined through the policies of governments toward international trade and the management of the exchange rate. A result of these policies was the accumulation of significant debt in the region that resulted in substantial economic instability. The final section of the book explains how all of these themes have contributed to two dominant problems for the region: poverty and inequality. The purpose of this book is to provide a comprehensive text for increasingly popular undergraduate economics courses on Latin America. However, the book has been carefully designed for use by both students majoring in economics and for those in other disciplines looking for a wide-ranging guide to the region. This book should be an invaluable resource for undergraduates looking at Latin American economics, growth and development. Selected Contents: 1. Latin America and the World Economy 2. Economic Growth and Latin America 3. Growth and the Environment in Latin America 4. Latin American Economic History 5. Latin America and Primary Commodities 6. Import Substitution in Latin America 7. Latin American Trade Policy 8. Exchange Rate Policy 9. Financing Current Account Deficits 10. Macroeconomic Policy in Latin America 11. Macroeconomic Stability 12. Poverty and Inequality March 2011: 234 x 156: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-48613-2: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49733-6: £35.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415497336

Overseas Research II A Practical Guide Christopher B. Barrett, Cornell University, USA and Jeffrey Cason, Middlebury College, USA ’Recommended’ – CHOICE Researchers in developing countries often find that the particular country in which they work presents a range of unforeseen challenges. Indeed, their ability to carry out effective scholarship is often highly dependent on these factors. An ability to negotiate a bewildering array of cultural and logistical obstacles is therefore essential. Overseas Research II: A Practical Guide distils essential lessons learned by scores of students and scholars who have collected data and done fieldwork abroad. The authors fill the reader in on the many crucial pieces of advice: how to prepare for the field, how and where to find funding for one’s fieldwork, issues of personal safety and security, and myriad logistical and relational issues that often define one’s research experience abroad. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Indentifying a Site and Funding Source 3. Predeparture Preparations 4. Setting Up to Live and Work 5. The Logistics of Fieldwork 6. Safety and Security Matters 7. The Challenges of the Field 8. Knowing When to Go Home 9. Pulling It All Together: The Postpartum 10. Epilogue: It’s Never Over

The Political Economy of Africa Edited by Vishnu Padayachee, University of KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa The Political Economy of Africa addresses the real possibilities for African development in the coming decades when seen in the light of the continent’s economic performance over the last half-century. This involves an effort to emancipate our thinking from the grip of western economic models that have often ignored Africa’s diversity in their rush to peddle simple nostrums of dubious merit. The book explores issues such as: • employment and poverty • social policy and security • structural adjustment programs and neo-liberal globalization • majority rule and democratization • taxation and resource mobilization. It contains a selection of country specific case studies from a range of international contributors, many of whom have lived and worked in Africa. The book will be of particular interest to higher level students in political economy, development studies, area studies (Africa) and economics in general. Selected Contents: 1. Introducing the African Economy Part 1: African Political Economy in Overview 2. The African Tragedy: International and National Roots 3. The Social Context of African Economic Growth 1960-2008 4. From the Political Economy of Development to Development Economics: Implications for Africa Part 2: Analytical Perspectives on Africa 5. Agro-Pessimism, Capitalism and Agrarian Change: Trajectories and Contradictions in Sub-Saharan Africa 6. The Political Economy of Taxation and Resource Mobilisation in Sub-Saharan Africa 7. Africa’s Revolving Door: External Borrowing and Capital Flight in Sub-Saharan Africa 8. The Political Economy of Social Policy and Social Security in Sub-Saharan Africa 9. Aid, Development and the State in Africa 10. Employment, Poverty and Inclusive Development in Africa: Policy Choices in the Context of Widespread Informality 11. Street Trading in Africa: Demographic Trends, Planning and Trader Organization 12. Africa and the ‘Second New Economy’: How Can Africa Benefit from ICT’s for a Sustainable Socio-Economic Development? Part 3: African Case Studies 13. Agricultural Policy in Africa – Renewal or Status Quo? A Spotlight on Kenya and Senegal 14. Liberalisation, State Intervention and the Demise of Industrial Development in Mozambique 15. Local Democracy, Clientelism and the (Re)Politicization of Urban Governance in African Cities: Reflexions from Johannesburg Stories 16. Many Conflicts, One Peace: The Congo Economy and Global Security 17. Mbimbos, Zvipamuzis and Primitive Accumulation in Zimbabwe’s Violent Mineral Economy: Crisis, Chaos and the State 18. Good Governance and Growth in Africa: What Can We Learn from Tanzania 19. Management of the CFA Franc in West Africa: From an Imposed Extroversion to Chosen Extroversion Part 4: New Directions 20. Africa’s Urban Revolution and the Informal Economy 21. Impacts and Challenges of a Growing Relationship between China and Sub-Saharan Africa 22. South Africa in Africa: From National Capitalism to Regional Integration 2010: 234 x 156: 456pp Hb: 978-0-415-48038-3: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48039-0: £36.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415480390

2010: 234 x 156: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-77833-6: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77834-3: £29.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415778343

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

dev e lop me n t s tudi e s s upp l e me n tary r e ad i n g

Achieving Education for All through Public-Private Partnerships? Non-State Provision of Education in Developing Countries Edited by Pauline Rose, University of Sussex, UK Series: Development in Practice Books Concern for achieving Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) by 2015 has led to a focus on the role that non-state providers (NSPs) can offer in extending access and improving quality of basic services. While NSPs can help to fill a gap in provision to those excluded from state provision, recent growth in both for-profit and not-for-profit providers in developing countries has sometimes resulted in fragmentation of service delivery. To address this, attention is increasingly given in the education sector to developing ‘partnerships’ between governments and NSPs. Partnerships are further driven by the expectation that the state has the moral, social, and legal responsibility for overall education service delivery and so should play a role in facilitating and regulating NSPs. This book was published as a special issue of Development in Practice. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Achieving Education for All through Public–private Partnerships? 2. Civil Society, Basic Education, and Sector-wide Aid: Insights from Sub-Saharan Africa 3. Marching to Different Rhythms: International NGO Collaboration with the State in Tanzania 4. The Roles of Non-state Providers in Ten Complementary Education Programmes 5. Reaching the Underserved with Complementary Education: Lessons from Ghana’s State and Non-state Sectors 6. Public–private Partnerships or Privatisation? Questioning the State’s Role in Education in India 7. Madrasas as Partners in Education Provision: The South Asian Experience 8. Struggles for Memory and Social-justice Education in Latin America Research Round-up 9. Collaboration in Delivering Education: Relations between Governments and NGOs in South Asia Viewpoint 10. Working Effectively with non-State Actors to Deliver Education in Fragile States 11. Non-state Providers, the State, and Health in Post-conflict Fragile States 12. Free Primary Education Still Excludes the Poorest of the Poor in Urban Kenya 13. The Evolution of NGO–government Relations in Education: ActionAid 1972–2009 2010: 246 x 174: 168pp Hb: 978-0-415-58371-8: £80.00

Poverty Capital

Contesting Development

Microfinance and the Making of Development

Critical Struggles for Social Change

Ananya Roy, University of California, Berkeley, USA

’Contesting Development is a fascinating collection of case studies from different parts of the world demonstrating how poor people who are excluded from the project of development challenge not just its performance but also its premises. It will be required reading in courses in disciplines such as sociology, anthropology, geography, women’s studies, urban studies and planning, and public policy.’ – Akhil Gupta, Anthropology, University of California, Los Angeles

’Poverty Capital is a must read for those interested in issues of poverty and inequality around the world. In taking an unflinching look at ’bottom billion capitalism,’ it shows how development actually works and how global markets are actually constructed. Although concerned with practices of microfinance in the global South, the book provides an analysis that is strikingly relevant for discussions of subprime markets, the financial crisis, and social justice here in America.’ – Robert Reich, Public Policy, University of California, Berkeley This is a book about poverty but it does not study the poor and the powerless. Instead it studies those who manage poverty. It sheds light on how powerful institutions control ’capital,’ or circuits of profit and investment, as well as ’truth,’ or authoritative knowledge about poverty. Such dominant practices are challenged by alternative paradigms of development, and the book details these as well. Using the case of microfinance, the book participates in a set of fierce debates about development – from the role of markets to the secrets of successful pro-poor institutions. Based on many years of research in Washington D.C., Bangladesh, and the Middle East, Poverty Capital also grows out of the author’s undergraduate teaching to thousands of students on the subject of global poverty and inequality. Selected Contents: 1. Small Worlds: The Democratization of Capital and Development 2. Global Order: Circuits of Capital Truth 3. Dissent at the Margins: Development and the Bangladesh Paradox 4. The Pollution of Free Money: Debt, Discipline, and Dependence in the Middle East 5. Subprime Markets: Poverty Capital 2010: 229 x 152: 272pp Pb: 978-0-415-87673-5: £22.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415876735

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415583718

eFocus on Development Studies New eBook Library Collection

An important additional feature is that the book as a whole reveals the limiting assumptions of development and suggests alternate conditions of possibility for social existence in the world today. In that sense, the book pushes the boundaries of ’thinking about development’ and makes an important theoretical contribution to the literature. Selected Contents: 1. Changing the Subject of Development 2. Have they Disabled Us? Liquor Production and Grammars of Material Distress in Rural India 3. Cities without Citizens: A Perspective on the Struggle of Abahlali baseMjondolo, the Durban Shackdweller Movement 4. Where does the Rural Educated Person Fit in a Market Society? Negotiating Social Reproduction in Contemporary India 5. Re-imagining the Nature of Development: Biodiversity Conservation and Pastoral Visions in the Northern Areas, Pakistan 6. Marketing and Militarizing Elections? Social Protest, Extractive Security and the De/Legitimation of ‘Civilian Transition’ in Nigeria and Mexico 7. The Land is Changing: Contested Agricultural Narratives in Northern Malawi 8. The Poverty of Neoliberalism in Chiapas, Mexico: Gendered Resistance via Neo-Zapatista Network Politics 9. Corporate Mobilization on the Mato Grosso Soybean Frontier, Brazil 10. Recoveries of Space and Subjectivity in the Shadow of Violence: the Clandestine Politics of Pavement Dwellers in Mumbai 11. Mobilizing Agrarian Citizenship: a New Rural Paradigm for Brazil 12. Demilitarizing Sovereignty: Self-Determination and Anti-Military Base Activism in Okinawa, Japan 13. Decolonizing Knowledge: Education, Inclusion, and the Afro-Brazilian Anti- Racist Struggle 14. Challenging Market Fundamentalisms: the Emergence of ‘Ethics, Cosmovisions, and Spiritualities’ in the World Social Forum 15. Development and its Discontents

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415873321

This unique resource provides scholars and development practitioners with a comprehensive view of the nature, scope and impact of changes taking place in developing and transition countries, offering authoritative insights into developmental issues of both regional and global importance. eFocus on Development Studies is available as a subscription package with 10 new eBooks added per year. View the complete package here: www.ebooksubscriptions.com/eFocusDevelopmentStudies For more information, pricing enquiries or to order your 30 day free trial, please contact your local online sales team: United States, Canada and South America Tel: 1-888-318-2367 Email: e-reference@taylorandfrancis.com

In this book, case studies serve as an effective means of teaching key concepts and theories in the sociology of development. This collection of cases, all original, never previously published and with framing essays by Phillip McMichael, has been written with this purpose in mind.

2009: 254 x 178: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-87331-4: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-415-87332-1: £30.99

This new collection represents global coverage of Development Studies with a combination of thematic and case studies covering the global south – Africa, Asia and Latin America.

UK and Rest of the world Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6062 Email: online.sales@tandf.co.uk

Edited by Philip McMichael, Cornell University, USA

eBooks

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

d evelo pm e n t studies supp le me n tary r e adi n g

Forthcoming

New

Understanding Sport in International Development

Global Learning and Sustainable Development

The Political Economy of Latin America

Tess Kay, Brunel University, UK

Edited by Helen Gadsby, Liverpool Hope University, UK and Andrea Bullivant, Liverpool World Centre, UK

Reflections on Neoliberalism and Development

Global learning and sustainable development encompass some of the key ideas and challenges facing the world today: challenges such as climate change, globalization and interdependence. Schools increasingly recognize the role of education in addressing these issues with young people, but exploring global issues across the curriculum requires a considerable amount of time and planning across subjects.

Peter Kingstone, University of Connecticut, USA

This book aims to reduce this workload by providing a clear overview of global learning, its development in policy and what this means for teachers in practice. It outlines the different ways in which global learning can be delivered as a cross-curricular theme, with examples of current activities and practice in schools.

This brief text offers an unbiased reflection on the neoliberal debate in Latin America and the institutional puzzle that underlies the region’s difficulties with democratization and development. In addition to providing an overview of this key element of the Latin American political economy, Peter Kingstone also advances an important but under-explored argument about political institutions. Kingstone offers a unique contribution by mapping out the problem of how to understand institutions, why they are created, and why Latin American ones function the way they do.

Series: Routledge Studies in Physical Education and Youth Sport This book makes an important contribution to the growing literature on sport in international development. It introduces and explores the practice and efficacy of international sport development through the experiences of young people who become engaged in sport programmes, as described in their own words and those of other members of their communities. Drawing on the findings of three in-depth research studies conducted with young people in Brazil, India and Zambia, the book provides a critical and wide-ranging portrayal of the role that sport can play within the lives of young people, locating this firmly within wider social, economic and political contexts. Alongside its delivery of new empirical research on young people, the book engages with fundamental academic debates surrounding ‘evidencing’ impacts of sport and explores issues surrounding the cultural specificity of research approaches currently in use in sport in development work. This contribution to theory and methodology has important implications beyond the international development context, to the broader area of research surrounding evidencing the impacts of sport. Based on unique data, the book extends our knowledge and understanding of youth sport and is essential reading for anybody with an interest in sport development, international development or sport in society. Selected Contents: 1. Sport in Development 2. Evidencing Sports Impacts in Sport-in-Development Contexts 3. Youth Development through Sport in Brazil 4. Youth Development through Sport in India 5. Youth Development through Sport in Zambia 6. Re-Valuing Sport 7. Research for Development in Sport-in-Development Contexts October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57305-4: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57307-8: £24.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415573078

Features include: • an examination of key influences and debates in this area • guidance on how to plan, implement and evaluate change in the curriculum to incorporate global learning • the role of Personal Learning and Thinking Skills as a way of exploring global learning and sustainable development • ideas from the ’global context’ of practice in Europe and beyond • activity ideas supported by case studies of innovative practice • links to other educational agendas, relevant topics and resources. Providing clear guidance on the underpinning theory and policy and drawing upon current initiatives in schools, this book will be of interest to all trainee and practising secondary teachers wanting to help young people engage critically with global issues.

Neoliberalism has been at the centre of enormous controversy since its first appearance in Latin America in the early 1970s. Even neoliberalism’s strongest supporters concede that it has not lived up to its promises and that growth, poverty, and inequality all have performed considerably worse than hoped.

Selected Contents: 1. Markets, States, and the Challenge of Development in Latin America 2. Import-Substitution Industrialization and the Great Transformation in Latin America 3. Neoliberalism and its Discontents 4. The Two Lefts and the Return of the State 5. Government, Markets and Institutions: Reflections on Development 2010: 229 x 152: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-99826-0: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99827-7: £24.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415998277

Selected Contents: Acknowledgements. Contents. Tables. Figures. Abbreviations used in the Book. List of Contributors. Introduction. 1. Global Learning: An historical overview 2. Current Policy and Practice 3. Educating for Global Citizenship 4. A European Dimension 5. Auditing and Setting up the Global Curriculum 6. Walking the Walk, (And More Importantly) Talking the Talk 7. Section 1. Provocations for Chapter 6 (How to do it) Section 2. Case Studies of School Practice Conclusion. Appendix

Full Table of Contents For full table of contents on all titles featured in this catalog, visit:

April 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-58409-8: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58410-4: £19.99

www.routledge.com/geography

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415584104

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date Binding

Isbn

Price

Global Poverty, Ethics and Human Rights

Desmond McNeill and Asunción Lera StClair

2009

Paperback

978-0-415-44594-8

£23.99

Hardback

978-0-415-44704-1

£80.00

e-Book

978-0-203-88130-9

Paperback

978-0-415-38153-6

£24.99

Hardback

978-0-415-38154-3

£95.00

e-Book

978-0-203-08601-8

Paperback

978-0-415-39531-1

£28.99

Hardback

978-0-415-39530-4

£99.00

e-Book

978-0-203-93921-5

Hardback

978-0-415-31959-1

£105.00

Paperback

978-0-415-31960-7

£29.99

e-Book

978-0-203-62503-3

Arresting Development

NGOs as Advocates for Development in a Globalising World

Development Beyond Neoliberalism?

Complimentary Exam Copy

Craig Johnson

Edited by Barbara Rugendyke

David Alan Craig and Doug Porter

2008

2007

2006

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

dev e lop me n t s tudi e s r e s e arc h mon og r a p h s

Development Studies research Monographs Forthcoming

Southern African Development Community Land Issues Towards a New Sustainable Land Relations Policy Edited by Ben Chigara, Brunel University, UK This book constitutes volume two of a set of two volumes. Volume two considers the possibility of a new, sustainable land relations policy for Southern African Development Community States (SADC) that are currently mired up in land disputes that have become subject of domestic, regional and international tribunals, including the SADC Tribunal and the Washington based International Centre for the Settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID). Selected Contents: Part 1: Ideological, Socio-economic and Cultural Issues Around Land 1. Land Ownership and Economic, Social and Cultural Rights in the Southern African Development Community (SADC), Manisuli Ssenyonjo 2. Genderised Land Reform and Social Justice – A Gender Perspective on the Formalization of Communal Land Tenure, Annika Rudman 3. Framing Women’s Rights and Citizenship within the Southern African Development Community (SADC) Land Reform Discourse: A Feminist Critique, Lyn Ossome 4. Land and Resource Rights, Tenure Arrangements and Reform in Community Based Natural Resource Management in Southern African Development Community (SADC), Munyaradzi Saruchera & Sibongile Manzana 5. The Land Question in Southern Africa: A Political Economy Perspective, Edward Lahiff Part 2: Possibilities and Further Challenges 6. Farm Workers on Private Agriculture Land Holdings: A Pathway to the Common Settlement of a Southern African Development Community (SADC) Land Issues?, Sibo Banda 7. Property Guarantees in Old and New Southern African Constitutions, Clement Ngongola 8. Southern African Development Community (SADC) within the Region: The African Union (AU) Approach to Land Issues, Rachel Murray 9. Deconstructing Southern African Development Community (SADC) Land Relations: Towards a New, Sustainable Land Relations Policy?, Ben Chigara August 2011: 234 x 156: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-58704-4: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415587044

Culture and the Environment in the Himalaya

Dispossession and Resistance in India

Edited by Arjun Guneratne, Macalester College, USA

The River and the Rage

Series: Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Alf Gunvald Nilsen, University of Bergen, Norway

Drawing on Himalayan ethnography to interrogate and critique contemporary theorizing about the environment, this book examines how the environment is conceptualized among different social groups in the region. A new approach to the study of the environment in South Asia, this book introduces the new thinking in environmental anthropology and geography into the study of the Himalaya.

Series: Routledge Advances in South Asian Studies

Selected Contents: 1. Downward Spiral? Interrogating Narratives of Environmental Change in the Himalaya 2. Healing Landscapes: Sacred and Rational Nature in Nepal’s Ayurvedic Medicine 3. Perceptions of Forests Amongst the Yakkha of East Nepal: Exploring the Social and Cultural Context 4. A Forest Community or Community Forestry? Beliefs, Meanings and Nature in North-Western Nepal 5. Where God’s Children Live: Symbolizing Forests in Nepal 6. Clear Mountains, Blurred Horizons: Limbu Perceptions of Their Physical World 7. The Role of Religion in Conservation and Degradation of Forests: Examples from the Kumaun Himalaya 8. The Abuse of Religion and Ecology: The Vishva Hindu Parishad and Tehri Dam 9. Restoration and Revival: Remembering the Bagmati Civilization 10. Beyond Cultural Models of the Environment: Linking Subjectivities of Dwelling and Power 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-77883-1: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415778831

Tsunami Recovery in Sri Lanka Ethnic and Regional Dimensions Edited by Dennis B. McGilvray, University of Colorado at Boulder, USA and Michele R. Gamburd, Portland State University, USA Series: Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series This book explores the aftermath of the tsunami in Sri Lanka, where coastal communities that are significantly different in terms of social structure, economy, language, religion, kinship, and cultural identity were affected. From a multidisciplinary perspective, it analyses regional and ethnic patterns of post-tsunami reconstruction according to different sectors of Sri Lankan society. Selected Contents: Part 1: Overview and Context 1. Introduction Michele R. Gamburd and Dennis B. McGilvray 2. Building the Conflict Back Better: The Politics of Tsunami Relief and Reconstruction in Sri Lanka Alan Keenan 3. Conflict, Coastal Vulnerability, and Resiliency in Tsunami-Affected Communities Randall Kuhn Part 2: Ethnographic Materials 4. The Golden Wave: Discourses on the Equitable Distribution of Tsunami Aid on Sri Lanka’s Southwest Coast Michele R. Gamburd 5. The Sea Goddess and the Fishermen: Religion and Recovery in Navalady, Sri Lanka Patricia Lawrence 6. Dreaming of Dowry: Post-Tsunami Housing Strategies in Eastern Sri Lanka Dennis B. McGilvray and Patricia Lawrence Part 3: Disaster Studies 7. Actors in a Masala Movie: Fieldnotes on the NGO Tsunami Response in Eastern Sri Lanka Timmo Gaasbeek 8. Principles Ignored and Lessons Unlearned: A Disaster Studies Perspective on the Tsunami Experience in Sri Lanka Georg E. Frerks 9. Conclusion Michele R. Gamburd and Dennis B. McGilvray 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-77877-0: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415778770

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

A Discussion Forum has been set up for this title. To add or read comments visit http://www. theriverandtherage.org/ This book deals with the controversies on developmental aspects of large dams, with a particular focus on the Narmada Valley projects in India. Based on extensive ethnographic fieldwork and research, the author draws on Marxist theory to craft a detailed analysis of how local demands for resettlement and rehabilitation were transformed into a radical anti-dam campaign linked to national and transnational movement networks. Conclusions drawn from the resistance to the Narmada dams can be applied to social movements in other parts of the Global South, where people are struggling against dispossession in a context of neoliberal restructuring. As such, this book will have relevance for people with an interest in South Asian studies, Indian politics and Development Studies. 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-55864-8: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415558648

Industrialisation and Rural Livelihoods in China Agricultural Processing in Sichuan Susanne Lingohr-Wolf, School of Oriental and African Studies, UK Series: Routledge Contemporary China Series This book investigates the impact of agricultural industrialisation models on rural livelihoods. LingohrWolf analyses the forms of household linkages with AI organisations, the underlying household incentives to diversify both labour and agricultural production towards AI, and the developmental benefits and potential constraints that shape such rural involvement. Selected Contents: 1. Livelihoods and the Agro-economy: Rural Transformations in China after 1978 2. Research Approach and Methods 3. The Case Study: The Sweet Potato (SP) Sector in Sichuan Province 4. Analysis of Linkage Forms in SP Processing 5. Benefits from Involvement in AI 6. Constraints and Limitations to Rural Livelihood Improvements 7. AI and Rural Livelihoods: Opportunities and Challenges 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-55937-9: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415559379

View any

product

online using the urls below each listing

d evelo pm e n t studies r e searc h mon og r ap h s

China and Africa Development Relations

India’s New Economic Policy

Edited by Christopher M. Dent, University of Leeds, UK

Edited by Waquar Ahmed, Mount Holyoke College, USA, Amitabh Kundu, Jawaharlal Nehru University, India and Richard Peet, Clark University, USA

Series: Routledge Contemporary China Series China is the most powerful of a number of large developing country or new powers on the ascendance in the international system, all of which are deepening their economic relations with Africa. The primary aim of this book is to investigate what is particularly special about the emerging development partnership between Africa and China, and how it may evolve in the future. Selected Contents: Part 1: China, Africa and International Development 1. Africa and China: A New Kind of Development Partnership? 2. China-Africa and the West: Ideology, Conditionality, Realpolitik: What is New in South–South Co-operation? 3. Towards a Critical Geo-Politics of China’s Engagement with African Development 4. Chinese Soft Power, Insecurity Studies, Myopia and Fantasy Part 2: Country Case Study Perspectives 5. The End of Abstraction: China’s Development Relations With Sudan 6. Chinese Development Co-operation and Africa: The Case of Tembisa’s Friendship Town Part 3: Resource Sector Perspectives 7. China’s Structural Demand and the Commodity Super Cycle: Implications for Africa 8. China’s Energy Diplomacy in Africa: The Convergence of National and Corporate Interests Part 4: Conclusion: Africa, China and Development Relations 9. China, Africa and Conceptualising Development Relations 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-56933-0: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415569330

A Critical Analysis

Series: Routledge Studies in Development and Society This edited volume critically examines the neoliberal shifts in India’s economic policies that have been implemented since 1991. Bringing together the leading figures in the discussion on India’s economic policy, this volume is the authoritative critical study of India’s New Economic Policy. Selected Contents: Introduction Waquar Ahmed, Amitabh Kundu and Richard Peet 1. Neoliberalism, Inequality and Development Richard Peet 2. From Mixed Economy to Neo-liberalism: Class and Caste in India’s Policy Transition Waquar Ahmed 3. Urban System in India: Trends, Economic Base, Governance and a Perspective of Growth under Globalization Amitabh Kundu 4. New Urbanism, Neoliberalism and Urban Restructuring in Mumbai Swapna Banerjee-Guha 5. Economic Liberalization and Urban Governance: Impact on Inclusive Growth Shipra Maitra 6. The Right to Waste: Informal Sector Recyclers and Struggles for Social Justice in Post-Reform Urban India Bharti Chaturvadi and Vinay Gidwani 7. From Red Tape to Red Carpet? Violent Narratives of Neoliberalizing Ahmedabad Ipsita Chatterjee 8. Neoliberalism, Environmentalism and Urban Politics in Delhi Rohit Negi 9. Coping with Challenges to Food Security: Climate Change, Biofuels and GMOs Suman Sahai 10. Imperialism, Resources and Food Security, with Reference to the Indian Experience Utsa Patnaik 11. Special Economic Zones: Space, Law and Dispossession Rupal Oza 12. Thinking Militant Particularisms Politically: Resistances to Neo-liberalism in India Dave Featherstone 13. Radical Peasant Movements and Rural Distress in India: A Study of the Naxalite Movement Raju Das 2010: 229 x 152: 334pp Hb: 978-0-415-80188-1: £70.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415801881

Development Studies monographs Title

Author/Editor

Date Binding

Isbn

Price

The Comparative Political Economy of Development

Edited by Barbara Harriss-White and Judith Heyer

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-55288-2

£85.00

Development Poverty and Politics

Richard Martin and Ashna Mathema

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-99562-7

£80.00

e-Book

978-0-203-86208-7

Economic and Human Development Debdas Banerjee in Contemporary India

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-55974-4

£85.00

Japanese Aid and the Construction of Global Development

Edited by David Leheny and Kay Warren

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-55448-0

£80.00

e-Book

978-0-203-86993-2

Rural-Urban Dynamics

Edited by Jytte Agergaard, Niels Fold and Katherine Gough

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-47562-4

£90.00

Water Policy Processes in India

Vandana Asthana

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-77831-2

£85.00

Community Development in Asia and the Pacific

Manohar S. Pawar

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-99874-1

£80.00

e-Book

978-0-203-86737-2

Rural Development Theory and Practice

Ruth McAreavey

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-95764-9

e-Book

978-0-203-87812-5

On the Edges of Development

Edited by Kum-Kum 2009 Bhavnani, John Foran, Priya Kurian and Debashish Munshi

Hardback

978-0-415-95621-5

e-Book

978-0-203-88044-9

Aid from International NGOs

Dirk-Jan Koch

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-48647-7

£85.00

Family Farms: Survival and Prospect

Harold Brookfield and 2007 Helen Parsons

Hardback

978-0-415-41441-8

£90.00

e-Book

978-0-203-93597-2

Complimentary Exam Copy

Environmental Studies Textbooks

£80.00 £80.00

Routledge Introductions to Environment Edited by David Pepper This series introduces core topics for environmental study and presents unparalleled interdisciplinary perspectives on issues of environmental concern. Focusing on human-environmental interrelationships, these concise, engaging, user-friendly texts respond particularly well to the demands of modular learning.

Forthcoming

Environment and Food Colin Sage, University College Cork, Ireland

This timely book provides a thorough introduction to the inter-relationship of food and the environment. Its primary purpose is to bring to our attention the multiplicity of linkages and interconnections between what we eat and how this impacts on the earth’s resources. Having a better idea of the consequences of our food choices might encourage us to develop more sustainable practices of production and consumption in the decades ahead. The author highlights the vital importance of global ecostystem services and explains why we should be concerned about the depletion of freshwater resources, soil fertility decline and loss of biological diversity. The book also tackles some of the enormous challenges of our era: climate change, and the prospect of significantly higher energy prices.. Such challenges are likely to have significant implications for the long-term functioning of global supply chains and raise profound questions regarding the nutritional security of the world’s population. The book argues that a re-examination of the assumptions and practices that underpin the contemporary food system is urgently required. Environment and Food is a highly original, inter-disciplinary and accessible text that will be of interest to students and the wider public genuinely interested in and concerned by the state of the world’s food provisioning system. It is richly illustrated with figures and makes extensive use of boxes to highlight relevant examples.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Why Environment and Food? 2. The Global Agri-Food System 3. The Ecological Basis of Primary Food Production 4. Global Challenges for Food Production 5. Final Foods: Transformation, Transportation and Waste 6. Food Security: Issues and Challenges 7. Towards A Sustainable Agri-food System 8. Conclusions July 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-36311-2: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-36312-9: £22.99 eBook: 978-0-203-01346-5 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415363129

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

e n v i ron me n tal s tudi e s te x tbo o k s

2nd Edition

New

Environmental Policy

Environment and Economy

Environment, Media and Communication

Jane Roberts, Open University, UK

Molly Scott Cato, University of Wales Institute, UK

Anders Hansen, University of Leicester, UK

The second edition has been updated to reflect advances in scholarship and the increasing primacy of climate policy within environmental policy as a whole. Key political, social and economic concepts are used to explain how effective environmental policies can be designed, implemented and evaluated. Environmental problems, the role of human beings in creating them and sustainable development are all introduced.

Environmental Policy is an accessible text with a multi-disciplinary perspective. Lively case studies drawn from a range of international examples, illustrate issues such as climate change, international trade, tourism and human rights. It includes chapter summaries, suggestions for further reading and links to relevant web resources.

Environment and Economy provides a stimulating introductory insight into the history of thinking that has linked the economy and the environment. It begins by introducing readers to the pioneers of this field, such as Fritz Schumacher and Paul Ehrlich, who first drew attention to the disastrous consequences for our environment of our ever-expanding economy. Part two of the book describes the main academic responses to the need to resolve the tension between economy and environment: environmental economics, ecological economics, green economics, and anti-capitalist economics. Part three is structured around key themes including an introduction to economic instruments such as taxes and regulation; pollution and resource depletion; growth; globalization vs. localization; and climate change. Each key issue is approached from a range of different perspectives, and working policies are presented in detail.

Selected Contents: 1. So, What’s the Problem? 2. The Roots of Environmental Problems 3. Sustainable Development and the Goals of Environmental Policy 4. Science and Technology: Policies and Paradoxes 5. Corporate Environmental Policy Making 6. Environmental Policy Making in Government 7. International Environmental Policy Making 8. Environmental Economics 9. Conclusion: Making Policy for the Planet 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-49784-8: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49785-5: £22.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415497855

Forthcoming

Environmental Governance James Evans, University of Manchester, UK As the study of how we manage the relations between society and the environment, environmental governance is central to these debates. This book considers ‘governance’ in a broad sense, to explore how the environment is controlled, manipulated, regulated, and contested by a range of actors and institutions. It highlights how the different approaches currently in play frame environmental problems in distinctive ways, privileging different solutions and types of change. Drawing on cutting edge debates, the question of change forms a core concern that runs throughout the book. Environmental Governance offers an unprecedented overview of dominant and emerging approaches to environmental governance, forging critical links between them and using diverse case studies to highlight their various advantages and disadvantages. This book is essential reading for students of the environment and anyone concerned changing society in order to prevent global environmental crisis.

As environmental issues move to the centre of the political debate, more attention is being focused on the role our economy has played in creating the ecological crisis, and what a sustainable economy might look like. In spite of the success of the environmental movement in drawing attention to the crisis facing us, there has been comparatively little attention focused on the way the operation of the global economy contributes to this crisis.

Written in an accessible style, this introductory text offers students with an engaging account of the way that the various traditions of economic thought have approached the environment, bringing them together for the first time in one volume. The text is complimented by boxes, case studies and recommended reading for each theme addressed. It will be of value to students interested in environmental sciences, geography, green issues and economics. Selected Contents: Part 1: Setting the Scene 1. Introduction: An Economy within the Environment 2. The Whistle-Blowers Part 2: Economic Schools and the Environment 3. Neoclassical Economics 4. Environmental Economics 5. Ecological Economics 6. Green Economics 7. Anti-capitalist Economics Part 3: Issues and Policies 8. A Range of Policy Approaches 9. Economic Growth 10. All that the Earth Provides: The Economics of Resources 11. Pollution 12. Globalisation vs. Localisation 13. Climate Change 14. Markets or Commons 15. Conclusion: Is it the Economy? Are We Stupid?

‘This book is a valuable contribution to the study of environmental communication because the author has conducted extensive research to inform readers about the construction of environmental messages in various communication channels including news, advertising, and cultural formats. An in-depth discussion of environmental campaigns makes this a practical guide for working professionals as well as an educational book for college students.’ – Lea Jane Parker, Northern Arizona University, USA ‘Hansen has been following the environmentmedia-communication story with a sharp eye for nearly two decades. He gathers all that experience into this comprehensive but readable volume that is a great starting point for environment students wanting to get their heads around media and vice versa.’ – Joe Smith, Open University, UK Environment, Media and Communication examines the social, cultural and political roles of the media as a public arena for images, representations, definitions and controversy regarding the environment. Offering a comprehensive introduction to theoretical approaches and models for the study of media and communication roles regarding the environment, and drawing on empirical research evidence and examples from Europe, America, Australia and Asia, the book will be of interest to students in media/communication studies, geography, environmental studies, political science and sociology as wll as to environmental professionals and activists. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Communication and the Construction of Environmental Issues 3. Making Claims and Managing News About The Environment 4. The Environment As News: News Values, News Media and Journalistic Practices 5. Popular Culture, Nature and Environmental Issues 6. Selling ‘Nature/The Natural’: Advertising, Nature, National Identity, Nostalgia and the Environmental Image 7. Media, Publics, Politics and Environmental Issues 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-42575-9: £79.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42576-6: £22.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86001-4 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415425766

January 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-47740-6: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47741-3: £22.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83415-2 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415477413

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Why Environmental Governance? 2. Understanding Governance 3. Emergence of the Environment as an Object of Governance 4. Institutions, Actors and Approaches 5. From State to Market 6. Business, Corporate Social Responsibility and Innovation 7. Environmental Decision Making and Risk 8. Adaptive Management 9. Changing Behaviour 10. Conclusions November 2011: 234 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-58981-9: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58982-6: £21.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415589826

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

e n viro nm en tal studie s tex tbo ok s

New

Forthcoming

Global Political Ecology

Environmental Justice

Edited by Richard Peet, Clark University, USA, Paul Robbins, University of Arizona, USA and Michael Watts, University of California, Berkeley, USA

Concepts, Evidence and Politics

Global Political Ecology links the political economy of global capitalism with the political ecology of a series of environmental disasters and failed attempts at environmental policies.

This critical volume draws together contributions from twenty-five leading intellectuals in the field. It begins with an introductory chapter that introduces the readers to political ecology and summarizes the books main findings. The following seven sections cover topics on the political ecology of war and the disaster state; fuelling capitalism: energy scarcity and abundance; global governance of health, bodies, and genomics; the contradictions of global food; capital’s marginal product: effluents, waste, and garbage; water as a commodity, human right, and power; the functions and dysfunctions of the global green economy; political ecology of the global climate; and carbon emissions. This book contains accounts of the main currents of thought in each area that bring the topics completely up-to-date. The individual chapters contain a theoretical introduction linking in with the main themes of political ecology, as well as empirical information and case material. Global Political Ecology serves as a valuable reference for students interested in political ecology, environmental justice, and geography. Selected Contents: Part 1: Food, Health and The Body: Political Ecology of Sustainability Part 2: Capital’s Margins: The Political Ecology the Slum World Part 3: Risk, Certification and the Audit Economy: Political Ecology of Environmental Governance Part 5: Fuelling Capitalism: Energy Scarcity and Abundance Part 6: Blue Ecology: the Political Ecology of Water Part 7: Biopolitics and Political Ecology: Genes, Transgenes and Genomics

September 2011: 234 x 156: 312pp Hb: 978-0-415-58973-4: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58974-1: £24.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415589741

J. Donald Hughes, University of Denver, USA

Social Science Methods and Practice Helen Newing, University of Kent, UK Conducting Research in Conservation is the first textbook on social science research methods written specifically for use in the expanding and increasingly multidisciplinary field of environmental conservation.

This book is a comprehensive and accessible guide to social science research methods for students of conservation related subjects and practitioners trained in the natural sciences. It features practical worldwide examples of conservation-related research in different ecosystems such as forests; grasslands; marine and riverine systems; and farmland. Boxes provide definitions of key terms, practical tips, and brief narratives from students and practitioners describe the practical issues that they have faced in the field. Selected Contents: Section 1: Planning a Research Project 1. Introduction: Social Science Research in Conservation 2. Defining the Research Topic 3. Developing the Research Design 4. Sampling Section 2: Methods 5. Participant Observation 6. Qualitative Interviews and Focus Groups 7. Questionnaires 8. Documenting Local Environmental Knowledge and Change 9. Community Workshops and the PRA Toolbox 10. Participatory Mapping Section 3: Fieldwork with Local Communities 11. Preparing for Fieldwork and Collecting and Managing Data in the Field 12. The Role of the Researcher 13. The Ethical Issues in Research Section 4: Data Processing and Analysis 14. Processing and Analysis of Qualitative Data 15. Quantitative Analysis: Descriptive Statistics 16. Quantitative Analysis: Inferential Statistics Section 5: Writing up the Report 17. Writing up the Report Chapter 18: Final Dissemination and Follow-up

Complimentary Exam Copy

Selected Contents: 1. Understanding Environmental Justice 2. Framing and Globalising Environmental Justice 3. Environmental Justice and Claim Making 4. Industry, Waste and the Distribution of Risk 5. Air Quality and Health: Breathing Unequally 6. Flooding and Disaster: Unequal Vulnerabilities 7. Greenspace and Well Being: an Unequal Good 8. Energy and Climate Change: Local and Global injustice 9. Governance and Policy: Justice in Interventions

Humankind’s Changing Role in the Community of Life

Conducting Research in Conservation

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415457927

This book focuses on such questions and the processes and complexities involved in answering them. Its aims to explore the diversity of ways in which environment and social difference are intertwined and how the justice of their interrelationship matters. It has a distinctive international perspective, tracing how the discourse of environmental justice has moved around the world and across scales to include global concerns, and examining research, activism and policy development in the US, the UK and Western Europe, South Africa and other countries.

An Environmental History of the World

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415548151

2010: 246 x 174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-45791-0: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45792-7: £24.99

Environmental justice has increasingly become part of the language of environmental activism, political debate, academic research and policy making around the world. It involves asking searching questions about how the environment has impacts on different people’s lives. Does pollution follow the poor? Are some communities far more vulnerable to the impacts of flooding or climate change than others? Are the benefits of access to green space for all, or only for some? Do powerful voices dominate environmental decisions to the exclusion of others?

2nd Edition

2010: 234 x 156: 464pp Hb: 978-0-415-54814-4: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-54815-1: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-84224-9

Gordon Walker, University of Lancaster, UK

This second edition of An Environmental History of the World continues to present a concise history, from ancient to modern times, of the interactions between human societies and the natural environment, including the other forms of life that inhabit our planet. Throughout their evolutionary history, humans have affected the natural environment, sometimes with a promise of sustainable balance, but also in a destructive manner. This book investigates the ways in which environmental changes, often the result of human actions, have caused historical trends in human societies. This process has happened in every historical period and in every part of the inhabited earth.

The book is organized into ten chapters. The main chapters follow a chronological path through the history of mankind, in relationship to ecosystems around the world. It takes account of new research and the course of history containing new sections on global warming, the response of New Orleans to the hurricanes Katrina and Rita, and the experience of the Dutch people in protecting their low-lying lands against the encroachments of rivers, lakes, and the North Sea. New material is also offered on the Pacific Islands, including the famous case of Easter Island. This is an original work that reaches further than other environmental histories. Rather than looking at humans and the environment as separate entities, this book places humans within the community of life. The relationship between environmental thought and actions, and their evolution, is discussed throughout. Little environmental or historical knowledge is assumed from the reader in this introduction to environmental history. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: History and Ecology 2. Primal Harmony 3. The Great Divorce of Culture and Nature 4. Ideas and Impacts 5. The Middle Ages 6. The Transformation of the Biosphere 7. Exploitation and Conservation 8. Modern Environmental Problems 9. Present and Future 10. Conclusion 2009: 246 x 174: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-48149-6: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48150-2: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-88575-8 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415481502

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

e n v i ron me n tal s tudi e s te x tbo o k s

Elements of Ecological Economics

3rd Edition

Jan Otto Andersson and Ralf Eriksson both at Åbo Akademi, Finland Elements of Ecological Economics provides a comprehensive introduction to the field of ecological economics, trying to give answers to the problems related to the overexploitation of the earth’s resources today. These include the problems of global warming (the greenhouse effect) and the overuse of the seas (e.g. overfishing). The book also gives an exposition of the closely related problems of global welfare and justice. It covers topics including: • the general policy perspective required by sustainability • economic growth in a historical perspective • sustainability conceptions and measurement within ecological economics • economics and ethics of climate change • global food security • the state of the seas on earth and locally (the Baltic Sea). As an introductory-level text the book will be useful to undergraduate students taking basic courses in economics and related fields, and will be comprehensible to anyone interested in environmental problems. The reader will easily see the practical relevance to the theoretical concepts presented and used in the book. Selected Contents: 1. The Global Ethical Trilemma 2. Economic Growth and Human Development 3. Ethics and Ecological Economics 4. Environmental Economics 5. Ecological Economics: The Science of Sustainability 6. The Economics and Ethics of Climate Change 7. Global Food Security 8. Man and the Seas: The Oceans and the Baltic Sea 9. Growth and Degrowth: Is Another Economy Possible? 2010: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-47380-4: £80.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-47381-1: £32.99

Environmental Economics and Natural Resource Management David A. Anderson, Centre College, Kentucky, USA This edition retains the application-based narratives and visual emphasis of the second edition, while covering the latest policy initiatives, following recent trends, and becoming even more user friendly. An expanded array of color photographs, diagrams, and other visual aids provide new perspectives on global environmental and resource issues. It covers topics including: • efficiency and cost-benefit analysis • globalization • population growth and poverty.

• natural resource management • environmental ethics

This fascinating textbook will be invaluable to students undertaking courses in environmental economics, ecological economics, and environmental and resource economics. The book includes an online Instructor’s Guide with answers to all the practice problems as well as downloadable slides of figures and tables from the book. Selected Contents: Part 1: Building a Foundation 1. The Big Picture 2. Efficiency and Choice 3. Market Failure 4. The Role of Government 5. Trade-offs and the Economy Part 2: Issues and Approaches 6. Environmental Quality 7. Energy 8. Sustainability 9. Population, Poverty, and Economic Growth 10. Biodiversity and Valuation 11. International and Global Issues Part 3: Policy and Procedure 12. Perspectives on Environmental Policy 13. Natural Resource Management: Renewable Resources 14. Natural Resource Management: Depletable and Replenishable Resources 15. Environmental Dispute Resolution 16. Morals and Motivation 2010: 246 x 189: 448pp Hb: 978-0-415-77904-3: £120.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-77905-0: £39.99

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415473811

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415779050

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment

Edited by Peter Morris and Riki Therivel

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-44174-2

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-44175-9

£29.99

e-Book

978-0-203-89290-9

Environmental Modelling

Sacred Ecology Environment and Politics

Environmental Values

Environment and Social Theory

Spaces of Sustainability

Sustainable Development

Introduction To Environmental Impact Assessment

Liberation Ecologies

Exploring Environmental Issues Energy, Society and Environment

Keith Beven

Fikret Berkes Timothy Doyle and Doug McEachern

John O’Neill, Alan Holland and Andrew Light

John Barry

Mark Whitehead

Susan Baker

John Glasson, Riki Therivel and Andrew Chadwick

Edited by Richard Peet and Michael Watts

David D. Kemp David Elliott

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

2008

2008 2007

2004

2006

2005

2004

2004 2003

Paperback

978-0-415-45759-0

£31.99

Hardback

978-0-415-46302-7

£99.99

e-Book

978-0-203-93248-3

Paperback

978-0-415-95829-5

£23.99

Hardback

978-0-415-95827-1

£105.00

Hardback

978-0-415-38052-2

£79.00

Paperback

978-0-415-38051-5

£22.99

e-Book

978-0-203-93297-1

Paperback

978-0-415-14509-1

£24.99

Hardback

978-0-415-14508-4

£89.00

e-Book

978-0-203-49545-2

Paperback

978-0-415-37616-7

£26.99

Hardback

978-0-415-37617-4

£105.00

e-Book

978-0-203-94692-3

Hardback

978-0-415-35803-3

£105.00

Paperback

978-0-415-35804-0

£26.99

e-Book

978-0-203-00409-8

Hardback

978-0-415-28210-9

£99.00

Paperback

978-0-415-28211-6

£24.99

e-Book

978-0-203-49593-3

Paperback

978-0-415-33837-0

£34.99

Hardback

978-0-415-33836-3

£95.00

e-Book

978-0-203-02306-8

Paperback

978-0-415-31236-3

£29.99

Hardback

978-0-415-31235-6

£120.00

e-Book

978-0-203-23509-6

Hardback

978-0-415-26863-9

£120.00

Paperback

978-0-415-26864-6

£33.99

Hardback

978-0-415-30485-6

£95.00

Paperback

978-0-415-30486-3

£26.99

e n viro nm en tal st u d ies t extbook s

Forthcoming

Forestry Economics A Managerial Approach

e n vi ron me n tal s tudi e s s upp l e me n tary r e a d i n g

Environmental Studies Supplementary Reading

John E. Wagner, State University of New York, USA Series: Routledge Textbooks in Environmental and Agricultural Economics

Forestry Economics introduces students and practitioners to all aspects of the management and economics of forestry. The book adopts the approach of managerial economics textbooks and applies this to the unique processes and problems faced by managers of forests. While most forestry economics books are written by economists for future economists, what many future forest and natural resource managers need is to understand what economic information is and how to use it to make better business and management decisions. John E. Wagner draws on his twenty years of experience teaching and working in the field of forest resource economics to present students with an accessible understanding of the unique production processes and problems faced by forest and other natural resource managers. There are three unique features of this book. • The first is its organization. The material is organized around two common economic models used in forest and natural resources management decision making. • The second is the use of case studies from various disciplines: Outdoor and Commercial Recreation, Wood Products Engineering, Forest Products, and Forestry. The purpose of these case studies is to provide students with applications of the concepts being discussed within the text. • The third is revisiting the question of how to use economic information to make better business decisions at the end of each chapter. This ties each chapter to the preceding ones and reinforces the hypothesis that a solid working knowledge of these economic models and the information they contain are necessary for making better business decisions. This textbook is an invaluable source of clear and accessible information on forestry economics and management for not only economics students, but for students of other disciplines and those already working in forestry and natural resources. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Production Systems 3. Costs 4. Revenue 5. Profit 6. Supply and Demand 7. Market Equilibrium and Structure 8. Capital Theory: Investment Analysis 9. The Forest Rotation Problem 10. Capital Theory: Risk 11. Forest Taxes 12. Estimating Nonmarket Values July 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-77440-6: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77476-5: £33.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415774765

Adaptation to Climate Change From Resilience to Transformation

Managing Adaptation to Climate Risk

Mark Pelling, Kings College London, UK

Beyond Fragmented Responses

Phil O’Keefe and Geoff O’Brien both at Northumbria University, UK

The impacts of climate change are already being felt. Learning how to live with these impacts is a priority for human development. In this context, it is too easy to see adaptation as a narrowly defensive task – protecting core assets or functions from the risks of climate change. A more profound engagement, which sees climate change risks as a product and driver of social as well as natural systems, and their interaction, is called for. Adaptation to Climate Change argues that without care, adaptive actions can deny the deeper political and cultural roots that call for significant change in social and political relations if human vulnerability to climate change associated risk is to be reduced. This book presents a framework for making sense of the range of choices facing humanity, structured around resilience (stability), transition (incremental social change and the exercising of existing rights) and transformation (new rights claims and changes in political regimes). The resilience-transition-transformation framework is supported by three detailed case study chapters. These also illustrate the diversity of contexts where adaption is unfolding, from organisations to urban governance and the national polity. This text is the first comprehensive analysis of the social dimensions to climate change adaptation. Clearly written in an engaging style, it provides detailed theoretical and empirical chapters and serves as an invaluable reference for undergraduate and postgraduate students interested in climate change, geography and development studies. Selected Contents: Part 1: Framework and Theory 1. Intellectual and Policy Context 2. Understanding Adaptation Part 2: The Resilience-Transition-Transformation Framework 3. Adaptation as Resilience: Social Learning and Self-Organization 4. Adaptation as Transition: Risk and Governance 5. Adaptation as Transformation: Risk Society, Human Security and the Social Contract Part 3: Living with Climate Change 6. Adaptation Within Organizations 7. Adaptation as Urban Risk Discourse and Governance 8. Adaptation as National Political Response to Disaster Part 4: Adapting with Climate Change 9. Conclusion: Adapting with Climate Change 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-47750-5: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47751-2: £23.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415477512

Complimentary Exam Copy

Forthcoming

Climate change is the single largest threat to the attainment of the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) and sustainable development. Addressing climate risk is a challenge for all. This book calls for greater collaboration between climate communities and disaster development communities. In discussing this, the book will evaluate the approaches used by each community to reduce the adverse effects of climate change. One area that offers some promise for bringing together these communities is through the concept of resilience. This term is increasingly used in each community to describe a process that embeds capacity to respond to and cope with disruptive events. This emphasizes an approach that is more focused on pre-event planning and using strategies to build resilience to hazards in an adaptation framework. The book will conclude by evaluating the scope for a holistic approach where these communities can effectively contribute to building communities that are resilient to climate driven risks. Selected Contents: 1. Can We Get It Together? 2. Discussing the Differences 3. The Concept of Resilience 4. Social Learning 5. Resilience Building 6. Beyond Fragmentation 7. Conclusion November 2011: 234 x 156: 356pp Hb: 978-0-415-60093-4: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-60094-1: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83691-0 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415600941

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

environmental studies research monographs New

5th Edition

Confronting Climate Change

Wolf and Stanley on Environmental Law

Constance Lever-Tracy, Flinders University, Australia Series: Short Cuts What are the manifest and likely future consequences of climate change? How will the world respond to the challenges of climate change in the twenty-first century? How should people think about confronting the politics of climate change? In this highly accessible introduction to the predicted global impacts of climate change, Constance Lever-Tracy provides an authoritative guide to one of the most controversial issues facing the future of our planet. Discussing how the social and natural sciences must work together more effectively in confronting climate change, Lever-Tracy provides a sober, critical assessment of the politics of global warming and climate change. By combining sociology, environmental studies and politics, Confronting Climate Change will serve as an introduction that will appeal to students and general readers alike. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: What Do We Know? 1. Introduction to Part 1 2. Knowns and Unknowns 3. Manifest Vulnerabilities 4. Future Risks 5. Confronting the Risks Part 2: What Can We Do? 6. Introduction to Part 2 7. Changing Our Practices 8. Changing Our Power: Natural Gas, Biofuels and Nuclear Energy 9. Changing Our Power: Water, Wind, Sun and Earth 10. Adapting to a Changing Climate Part 3: Who Can Do It? 11. From the Bottom Up or the Top Down 12. Global Conflict or Co-operation? 13. Conclusion March 2011: 198 x 129: 120pp Pb: 978-0-415-57623-9: £17.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415576239

Susan Wolf, Northumbria University, UK and Neil Stanley, University of Leeds, UK Wolf and Stanley on Environmental Law is a lively and accessible account of pollution control law in England and Wales. Written with real clarity and supported by a range of learning features, this text offers an excellent starting point to those encountering this diverse and controversial subject for the first time. This new edition has been fully updated and revised to take into account all the recent developments in the subject, including coverage of the Clean Neighbourhoods and Environment Act 2005, the Hazardous Waste Regulations 2005, the Environmental Permitting (England and Wales) Regulations 2007, the Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland 2007 and developments in environmental tort case law such as Corby Group Litigation v Corby Borough Council (2008). Further afield, Wolf and Stanley also considers the EC Environmental Liability Directive 2004, the Environmental Information Regulations 2004 and the Lisbon Treaty 2009.

Neoliberal Environments

Cities and Climate Change

A Chance to Reclaim, Self, Society and Nature Edited by Mark Pelling, David Manuel Navarrete and Michael Redclift, King’s College London, UK Series: Routledge Studies in Human Geography November 2011: 234 x 156: 276pp Hb: 978-0-415-67694-6: £85.00

Selected Contents: Elements of Environmental Law. The Administration and Enforcement of Environmental Law. European Community Environmental Law and Policy. Water Pollution. Waste Management. Integrated Pollution Control and Integrated Pollution Prevention and Control. Contaminated Land. Atmospheric Pollution. Statutory Nuisance. Noise Pollution. The Private Regulation of Environmental Pollution: The Common Law. The Private Regulation of Environmental Pollution: The Public Concern. Private Prosecution. Judicial Review. Access to Information and Human Rights

Transitions to Sustainable Development

Date Binding

Isbn

Price

2008

Paperback

978-0-415-47790-1

£17.99

Hardback

978-0-415-47789-5

£70.00

e-Book

978-0-203-88846-9

Paperback

978-0-415-77149-8

£28.99

Hardback

978-0-415-77148-1

£105.00

e-Book

978-0-203-94684-8

Paperback

978-0-415-35916-0

£29.99

Hardback

978-0-415-27379-4

£110.00

e-Book

978-0-203-21925-6

Edited by Nik Heynen, James McCarthy, Scott Prudham and Paul Robbins

2007

Michelle Betsill and Harriet Bulkeley

2005

New Directions in the Study of Long Term Transformative Change John Grin, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands, Jan Rotmans, Erasmus University Rotterdam, the Netherlands and Johan Schot, Technische Universiteit Eindhoven, the Netherlands Series: Routledge Studies in Sustainability Transitions

backlist Author/Editor

Climate Change and the Crisis of Capitalism

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415676946

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415418461

The Complete Guide to Climate Brian Dawson and Change Matt Spannagle

Forthcoming

Suitable for students of environmental law and the wider environmental studies, Wolf and Stanley is a valuable guide to this wide-ranging subject.

2010: 246 x 174: 680pp Pb: 978-0-415-41846-1: £28.99

Title

Environmental Studies research Monographs

Over the past few decades, there has been a growing concern about the social and environmental risks which have come along with the progress achieved through a variety of mutually intertwined modernization processes. In recent years these concerns are transformed into a widely-shared sense of urgency, partly due to events such as the various pandemics threatening livestock, and increasing awareness of the risks and realities of climate change, and the energy and food crises. This sense of urgency includes an awareness that our entire social system is in need of fundamental transformation. But like the earlier transition between the 1750’s and 1890’s from a pre-modern to a modern industrial society, this second transition is also a contested one. Sustainable development is only one of many options. This book addresses the issue on how to understand the dynamics and governance of the second transition dynamics in order to ensure sustainable development. It will be necessary reading for students and scholars with an interest in sustainable development and long-term transformative change. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Dynamics of Transitions: A Socio-Technical Perspective Part 2: Towards a Better Understanding of Transitions and Their Governance: A Systemic and Reflexive Approach Part 3: Understanding Transitions from a Governance Perspective 2010: 229 x 152: 418pp Hb: 978-0-415-87675-9: £30.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85659-8 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415876759

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

e n viro nm en tal studie s RESEARCH mon og r ap h s

The Cooperation Challenge of Economics and the Protection of Water Supplies

Environmental Efficiency, Innovation and Economic Performances

A Case Study of the New York City Watershed Collaboration

Edited by Anna Montini, University of Bologna, Italy and Massimiliano Mazzanti, University of Ferrara, Italy

Joan Hoffman, John Jay College of Criminal Justice, USA Series: Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics In this book, Joan Hoffman examines the watershed collaboration from an economic perspective as well as the possibility of alternative means of water protection such as regulation. The case is examined in the light of similar collaborations elsewhere in the world. Selected Contents: Introduction: The Problem and the Questions 1. New York City’s Case, Needed Cooperation, and Collaboration Needs 2. The Vision 3. Watershed Collaborations: Green Milieus for Sustainable Development? 4. Rural Economies and the Drama of Farm and Forest 5. Implementation: The Collaboration as a Learning Machine 6. Conflict 7. Evaluation 8. Lessons Learned: The Art of Paying for Ecological Services 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-77470-3: £85.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415774703

Carbon Responsibility and Embodied Emissions Theory and Measurement João F.D. Rodrigues, Tiago M.D. Domingos and Alexandra P.S. Marques all at Instituto Superior Técnico (IST), Lisbon, Portugal Series: Routledge Studies in Ecological Economics This book investigates environmental indicators accounting for indirect emissions (as embodied in international trade) within the framework of input-output analysis and introduces an indicator of environmental responsibility derived from consumer and producer responsibility. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Accounting Indirect Emissions 3. Carbon Indicators 4. Carbon Responsibility 5. Multi-Regional IO Model 6. Carbon Responsibility of World Regions 7. Discussion 2010: 216 x 138: 128pp Hb: 978-0-415-47020-9: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415470209

Participation in Environmental Organizations Benno Torgler, Queensland University of Technology, Australia, Maria A. Garcia-Valiñas, Toulouse School of Economics, France and Alison Macintyre, Queensland University of Technology, Australia Series: Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics This book analyzes the determinants of environmental participation and its consequences in different parts of the world, focusing on whose values are forwarded through voluntary activities and how far voluntary participation is representative. 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-44631-0: £90.00

Series: Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics This volume brings together microeconomics studies on firms’ eco and economic performance both in the industrial and service sector; by considering a sector based perspective rooted mainly in the exploitation of NAMEA data; at regional level, and a macroeconomic analysis of the environment, income and welfare. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Environmental Innovation, Firms’ Economic Performances and Policy Drivers 1. Environmental Innovation Drivers and Economic Performance in Industrial Systems 2. The Dynamic Relationship between Emissions and Manufacturing Firm’s Growth 3. Environmentally-Oriented Strategies and Firm Performance in Services 4. An Early Assessment of the Influence on Eco-Innovation of the EU Emissions Trading Scheme: Evidence from the Italian Paper Industry Part 2: Environmental Efficiency and Sector Performances 5. Emissions Trends and Labour Productivity Dynamics 6. Production-Related Air Emissions: A Decomposition Analysis for Italy 7. Regional and Sector Environmental Efficiency: Empirical Evidence using the Italian RAMEA 8. Biofuels Public Support and Technological Specialization in the Energy Sector 9. Environmental Impacts of Personal Mobility: Exploring an Austrian EKC Part 3: Economic Growth, Environmental Degradation and Policies 10. Reconsidering the Environmental Kuznets Curve Hypothesis: The Trade Off between Environment and Welfare 11. Environmental Degradation, Economic Growth and Welfare: The Role of Self-Protection Choices 12. Carbon Kuznets Curves: Long-Run Dynamics and Policy Events 13. The EU ETS: CO<->2<-> Price Drivers During the Learning Experience 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-47852-6: £85.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415478526

Environmental Policies for Air Pollution and Climate Change in the New Europe Caterina De Lucia, University of York, UK Series: Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics This book presents an integrated approach to recent regulations on air pollution with particular emphasis on transborder air pollution, climate change and energy policies in the new Europe. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. European Air Pollution Regulation 3. A Case Study on Modelling Transboundary Air Pollution Policy in an Enlarged Europe 4. Market Based Approach to Air Pollution and Climate Change 5. New EU Policy Initiatives for Air Pollution and Climate Change 2010: 216 x 138: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-49814-2: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415498142

Optimal Control of Age-structured Populations in Economy, Demography, and the Environment Edited by Raouf Boucekkine, Université Catholique de Louvain, Belgium, Natali Hritonenko, Prairie View A&M University, USA and Yuri Yatsenko, Houston Baptist University, USA Series: Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics This book covers a wide range of topics within mathematical modelling and the optimization of economic, demographic, technological and environmental phenomena. Each chapter is written by experts in their field and represents new advances in modelling theory and practice. These essays are exemplary of the fruitful interaction between theory and practice when exploring global and local changes. 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-77651-6: £90.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415776516

New

Ecosystem Services and Global Trade of Natural Resources Ecology, Economics and Policies Edited by Thomas Köllner, University of Bayreuth, Germany Series: Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics This collection is a valuable contribution to the global change science dealing with ecosystem services. It illustrates the consequences of international trade on global ecosystem services and provides an overview of accounting tools and of market-based policy instruments to address negative and positive externalities. Selected Contents: 1. Ecosystem Services and Global Trade of Natural Resources: An Introduction Part 1: Foundations for Understanding the Trade of Natural Resources and its Implication for Ecosystem Services 2. Global Human Dependence on Ecosystem Services 3. Economics of Global Trade and Ecosystem Services 4. International Trade Policies and Ecosystem Services 5. The Need for Global Governance of Ecosystem Services: a Human-Environment Systems Perspective on Biofuel Production Part 2: Ecosystem Impacts of Global Flows of Virtual Land, Water and Sea in the Physical Economy 6. Ecosystem Impacts of Virtual Land Use Embodied in Traded Goods and Services 7. Ecosystem Impacts of Virtual Water Embodied in Global Trade of Agricultural Products 8. Global Trade of Fisheries Products-implications for marine ecosystems and their services Part 3: Accounting Tools for Global Ecosystem Services 9. Life Cycle Assessment and Ecosystem Services 10. Ecosystem Services in Green National Accounting Part 4: Instruments for Global Governance of Ecosystem Services 11. Fair Trade, Environmental Labels, Bans and Ecosystem Services 12. International Payments for Ecosystem Services: Principles and Practices 13. International Biodiversity Offsets 14. Landscape Labeling: Combining Certification with Ecosystem Service Conservation at Landscape Scales Conclusion 15. Governance of Ecosystem Services in a World of Global Trade May 2011: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-48583-8: £85.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415485838

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415446310

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

en viron me n tal s tudi e s RESEARCH mon og r a p h s

Bioregionalism and Global Ethics A Transactional Approach to Achieving Ecological Sustainability, Social Justice, and Human Well-being Richard Evanoff, Aoyama Gakuin University, Japan 2010: 229 x 152: 300pp Hb: 978-0-415-87479-3: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415874793

Ecocriticism and Early Modern English Literature Green Pastures Todd A. Borlik, Bloomsburg University, USA Series: Routledge Studies in Renaissance Literature and Culture 2010: 229 x 152: 292pp Hb: 978-0-415-87861-6: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415878616

New

The Politics of Biofuels, Land and Agrarian Change Edited by Saturnino M. Borras Jr., St Mary’s University, Canada, Philip McMichael, Cornell University, USA and Ian Scoones, University of Sussex, UK Series: Critical Agrarian Studies This book addresses key questions on biofuels, land and agrarian change within agrarian political economy, political sociology and political ecology. It was published as a special issue of the Journal of Peasant Studies. Selected Contents: 1. The Politics of Biofuels, Land and Agrarian Change: Editors’ Introduction 2. Agrofuels Capitalism: A View From Political Economy 3. Agrofuels in The Food Regime 4. Forests, Food, and Fuel in the Tropics: The Uneven Social and Ecological Consequences of the Emerging Political Economy of Biofuels 5. Assumptions in the European Union Biofuels Policy: Frictions with Experiences in Germany, Brazil and Mozambique 6. Power is Sweet: Sugarcane in the Global Ethanol Assemblage 7. Fields of Dreams: Negotiating an Ethanol Agenda in the Midwest United States 8. Biofuels in Brazil: Debates and Impacts 9. Biofuel, Dairy Production and Beef in Brazil: Competing Claims on Land use in Sao Paulo State 10. Agrofuel Policies in Brazil: Paradigmatic and Territorial Disputes 11. Processes of Inclusion and Adverse Incorporation: Oil Palm and Agrarian Change in Sumatra, Indonesia 12. The Biofuel Connection – Transnational Activism and the Palm Oil Boom 13. The Political Ecology of Jatropha Plantations for Biodiesel in Tamil Nadu, India 14. Over the Heads of Local People: Consultation, Consent, and Recompense in Large-Scale Land Deals for Biofuels Projects in Africa 15. Big Sugar in Southern Africa: Rural Development and the Perverted Potential of Sugar/ Ethanol Exports 16. The Politics of Jatropha-based Biofuels in Kenya: Convergence and Divergence Among NGOs, Donors, Government Officials and Farmers March 2011: 246 x 174: 416pp Hb: 978-0-415-61320-0: £90.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415613200

New

Mathematics for the Environment

Environmental Criticism for the Twenty-First Century

Martin Walter, University of Colorado, Boulder, USA

Edited by Stephanie LeMenager, Teresa Shewry and Ken Hiltner all at University of California, Santa Barbara, USA

Mathematics for the Environment shows how to employ simple mathematical tools, such as arithmetic, to uncover fundamental conflicts between the logic of human civilization and the logic of Nature. These tools can then be used to understand and effectively deal with economic, environmental, and social issues. With elementary mathematics, the book seeks answers to a host of real-life questions, including: • how safe is our food and will it be affordable in the future? • what are the simple lessons to be learned from the economic meltdown of 2008–2009? • is global climate change happening? • were some humans really doing serious mathematical thinking 50,000 years ago? • what does the second law of thermodynamics have to do with economics? • how can identity theft be prevented? • what does a mathematical proof prove? A truly interdisciplinary, concrete study of mathematics, this classroom-tested text discusses the importance of certain mathematical principles and concepts, such as fuzzy logic, feedback, deductive systems, fractions, and logarithms, in various areas other than pure mathematics. It teaches students how to make informed choices using fundamental mathematical tools, encouraging them to find solutions to critical real-world problems. Selected Contents: Mathematics Is Connected to Everything Else. Math and Nature: The Nature of Math. One of the Oldest Mathematical Patterns. Counting. Box Models: Population, Money, Recycling. Chance: Health, Surveillance, Spies, and Voting. Economics. Media Literacy. References. Index. January 2011: 235 x 156: 679pp Hb: 978-1-4398-3472-5: £57.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781439834725

Series: Routledge Interdisciplinary Perspectives on Literature Environmental Criticism for the Twenty-First Century showcases the recent explosive expansion of environmental criticism, which is actively transforming three areas of broad interest in contemporary literary and cultural studies: history; scale, and science. With contributors engaging texts from the medieval period through the twenty-first century, the collection brings into focus recent ecocritical concern for the long durations through which environmental imaginations have been shaped. Contributors also address problems of scale, including environmental institutions and imaginations that complicate conventional rubrics such as the national, local, and global. Finally, this collection brings together a set of scholars who are interested in drawing on both the sciences and the humanities in order to find compelling stories for engaging ecological processes such as global climate change, peak oil production, nuclear proliferation, and food scarcity. Selected Contents: Introduction. Section 1: Science 1. The Mesh 2. Posthuman/Postnatural: Ecocriticism and the Sublime in Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein 3. Revisiting the Virtuoso: Natural History Collectors and Their Passionate Engagement with Nature 4. Chimerical Figurations at the Monstrous Edges of Species 5. The City Refigured: Environmental Vision in a Transgenic Age Section 2: History 6. Ecopoetics and the Origins of English Literature 7. Amerindian Eden: the Divine Weekes of Du Bartas 8. Erasure by U.S. Legislation: Ruiz de Burton’s Nineteenth Century Novels and the Lost Archive of Mexican American Environmental Knowledge 9. Shifting the Center: A Tradition of Environmental Literary Discourse from Africa 10. Ecomelancholia: Slavery, War and Black Ecological Imaginings Section 3: Scale 11. Home Again: Peak Oil, Climate Change, and the Aesthetics of Transition 12. Reclaiming Nimby: Nuclear Waste, Jim Day, and the Rhetoric of Local Resistance 13. Imagining a Chinese Eco-City 14. ’No Debt Outstanding’: The Postcolonial Politics of Local Food 15. Pathways to the Sea: Involvement and the Commons in Works by Ralph Hotere, Cilla McQueen, Hone Tuwhare, and Ian Wedde Afterword. An Interview with Elaine Scarry April 2011: 229 x 152: 264pp Hb: 978-0-415-88630-7: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415886307

BACKLIST Title

Author/Editor

The Environment Encyclopedia and Directory 2010

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

2009

Hardback

978-1-85743-377-7

£310.00

Economic Growth and Environmental Regulation

Edited by Timothy Swanson and Tun Lin

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-55127-4

£85.00

Environmental Amenities and Regional Economic Development

Edited by Todd L. Cherry and Dan Rickman

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-48607-1

£130.00

Drivers of Environmental Change in Uplands

Aletta Bonn, Tim Allott, Klaus Hubacek and Jon Stewart

2009

Paperback

978-0-415-56408-3

£24.95

New Perspectives on Agrienvironmental Policies

Edited by Stephan J Goetz and Floor Brouwer

2009

£95.00

Ecological Economics

Edited by Clive Spash

Water and Disasters

Edited by Chennat Gopalakrishnan and Norio Okada

Encyclopedia of the Arctic

Hardback

978-0-415-77702-5

e-Book

978-0-203-86780-8

2009

Hardback

978-0-415-43145-3

£680.00

2007

Hardback

978-0-415-45426-1

£85.00

Edited by Mark Nuttall 2004

Hardback

978-1-57958-436-8

£365.00

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

e n viro nm en tal studie s RESEARCH mon og r ap h s

Lawscape

River Basins at the Limit

Sustainability in European Transport Policy

Water, Food and Livelihoods in River Basins

Matthew Humphreys, Kingston University, UK

Edited by Myles J. Fisher, University of Glasgow, UK and Simon E. Cook, Centro Internacional de Agricultura Tropical, Canada

This book sets out a critical analysis of the body of law and policy initiatives that constitute the EU’s common transport policy. The development of the transport policy is charted through amending and founding treaties as well as non-legislative documents. The book uses a model of sustainability as the basis for the analysis as the criteria for sustainable development were set out under Article Eleven of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union. However, sustainable development, when taken in the context of transport is difficult to reconcile with unbridled economic growth and unchecked freedom of movement and the book identifies a contradiction at the heart of European policy which can only become more accentuated as environmental trends become more explicit. The book argues that European regulation will eventually be forced to recognize this dichotomy, and take more forceful action to protect environmental and social development, even at the cost of economic progress.

Nicole Graham, University of Technology, Sydney, Australia

Forthcoming

This book was published as a special issue of Water International. Selected Contents: Part 1 1. Introduction 2. The Basins in the Andes 3. The São Francisco Basin 4. The Niger Basin 5. The Volta Basin 6. The Limpopo Basin 7. The Nile Basin 8. The Karkheh Basin 9. The Indo-Gangetic Basin 10. The Mekong Basin 11. The Yellow River Basin 12. Conclusion/ Resume Part 2 13. Introduction 14. The Role of Water in Poverty 15. More Food with Less Water - pPssibilities Arising from a Cross Basin Analysis 16. Poverty in River Basins 17. Progressing from Research to Improved Livelihoods in Developing Country River Basins: Institutional Pathways, Highways, Detours, and Dead Ends 18. The Resilience of Big River Basins 19. Global Climate Change 20. Conclusions October 2011: 246 x 174: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-59207-9: £80.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415592079

Improving Water Policy and Governance Edited by Cecilia Tortajada, Instituto Aragonés del Agua, Spain and Asit K Biswas, Third World Centre for Water Management, Mexico This book analyzes case studies of good water governance from different parts of the world and the enabling environments that made it possible. This book was published as a special issue of the International Jounral of Water Resources Development. Selected Contents: 1. Future Water Governance: Problems and Perspectives 2. Water Governance in the Middle East and North Africa: An Unfinished Agenda 3. Water Supply of Phnom Penh: An Example of Good Governance 4. Service Quality and Performance Measurement: Evidence from the Indian Water Sector 5. Municipal Water Supply Management in Bangkok: Achievements and Lessons 6. Is Access to Water as Good as the Data Claim? Case Study of Yucatan 7. Challenges for Water Governance in Rural Water Supply: Lessons Learned from Tanzania 8. Governing to Grow Enough Food without Enough Water – Second Best Solutions Show the Way 9. Irrigation Modernization in Spain: Effects on Water Quantity and Quality – A Conceptual Approach 10. A Spatial Planning Perspective for Measures Concerning Flood Risk Management 11. Water Governance: Some Critical Issues 12. Water Governance: A Research Agenda 2010: 246 x 174: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-60628-8: £80.00

This book will be of great interest to researchers and students on European Union law and policy courses, transport studies courses and European integration courses. The book is of relevance to all those interested in environmental and transport matters. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The Legislative and Policy Context of the Common Transport Policy 2. European Transport Initiatives 3. The Polluter Pays Principle: The Theory of Market Mechanisms 4. Road Pricing in Theory and Practice 5. Sustainable Development and Transport 6. The Polluter Pays Principle in Practice 7. Conclusions

Property, Environment, Law

Lawscape: Property, Environment, Law considers the ways in which property law transforms both natural environments and social economies. Addressing law’s relationship to land and natural resources through its property regime, Lawscape engages the abstract philosophy of property law with the material environments of place. Whilst most accounts of land law have contributed cultural analyses of historical and political value predominantly through the lens of property rights, few have contributed analyses of the natural consequences of property law through the lens of property responsibilities. Lawscape does this by addressing the relationship between the commodification of land, instituted in and by property law, and ecological and economic histories. Its synthesis of property law and environmental law provides a genuinely transdisciplinary analysis of the particular cultural concepts and practices of land tenure that have been created, and exported, across the globe. Selected Contents: Foreword: Alain Pottage 1. Introduction 2. Conceptual Origins 3. Material Origins: Practices Nation 4. Material Origins: Empire 5. Conceptual Developments 6. Contemporary Practices 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-47559-4: £75.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415475594

2010: 234 x 156: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-57831-8: £70.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415578318

eFocus on The Environment New eBook Library Collection Growing concerns about climate change, pollution and environmental degradation have put the environment at the top of the agenda in the early decades of the 21st Century. This collection includes books from 18 disciplines in an attempt to offer the broadest possible understanding of environmental issues. Its coverage ranges from philosophical works exploring environmental values to works offering practical suggestions to immediate policy questions. Key features:

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415606288

» » »

5th Edition

eFocus on The Environment is available as a subscription package with 10 new eBooks added per year.

The Environment Encyclopedia and Directory 2010

View the complete package here: www.ebooksubscriptions.com/eFocusEnvironment

Europa Publications This is the standard reference work on environmental issues throughout the world.

Global coverage with extensive treatment of both the developed and developing world Particular attention to the concept of sustainability, at both a micro and a macro level Looks at the impact of tourism and other major industries.

For more information, pricing enquiries or to order your 30 day free trial, please contact your local online sales team: UK and Rest of the world Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6062 Email: online.sales@tandf.co.uk

United States, Canada and South America Tel: 1-888-318-2367 Email: e-reference@taylorandfrancis.com

eBooks

2009: 279 x 211: 736pp Hb: 978-1-85743-377-7: £310.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781857433777

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

p h ys i cal g e og r ap hy te x tbo o k s

Physical Geography Textbooks New

3rd Edition

Physical Geography: The Basics

Fundamentals of Geomorphology Richard Hugget, University of Manchester, UK This extensively revised, restructured, and updated edition continues to present an engaging and comprehensive introduction to the subject, exploring the world’s landforms from a broad systems perspective. It covers the basics of Earth surface forms and processes, while reflecting on the latest developments in the field. Fundamentals of Geomorphology begins with a consideration of the nature of geomorphology, process and form, history, and geomorphic systems, and moves on to discuss:

Joseph Holden, University of Leeds, UK Series: The Basics Physical Geography: The Basics is a concise and engaging introduction to the interactions, systems and processes that have shaped, and continue to shape, the physical world around us. This book introduces five key aspects of the study of physical geography:

New

• structure: structural landforms associated with plate tectonics and those associated with volcanoes, impact craters, and folds, faults, and joints • process and form: landforms resulting from, or influenced by, the exogenic agencies of weathering, running water, flowing ice and meltwater, ground ice and frost, the wind, and the sea; landforms developed on limestone; and landscape evolution, a discussion of ancient landforms, including palaeosurfaces, stagnant landscape features, and evolutionary aspects of landscape change This third edition has been fully updated to include a clearer initial explanation of the nature of geomorphology, of land surface process and form, and of land-surface change over different timescales. The text has been restructured to incorporate information on geomorphic materials and processes at more suitable points in the book. Finally, historical geomorphology has been integrated throughout the text to reflect the importance of history in all aspects of geomorphology. Fundamentals of Geomorphology provides a stimulating and innovative perspective on the key topics and debates within the field of geomorphology. Written in an accessible and lively manner, it includes guides to further reading, chapter summaries, and an extensive glossary of key terms. The book is also illustrated throughout with over 200 informative diagrams and attractive photographs, all in colour. Supporting documents, including figures and plates from the book are available to download online. Visit our website for more information. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introducing Landforms and Landscapes 1. What is Geomorphology 2. Introducing Process and Form 3. Introducing History 4. The Geomorphic System Part 2: Structure 5. Plate Tectonics and Associated Structural Landforms 6. Volcanoes, Impacts Craters, Folds, and Faults Part 3: Process and Form 7. Weathering and Associated Landforms 8. Hillslopes 9. Fluvial Landscapes 10. Glacial and Glaciofluvial Landscapes 11. Periglacial Landscapes 12. Aeollian Landscapes 13. Coastal Landscapes 14. Karst Landscapes 15. Landscape Evolution: Long Term Geomorphology March 2011: 246 x 189: 536pp Hb: 978-0-415-56774-9: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56775-6: £32.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86008-3

• atmosphere, weather and climate systems • the carbon cycle and historic and contemporary climate change • plate tectonics, weathering, erosion and soils • the role of water and ice in shaping the landscape and impacting human activity • the patterns of plant and animal life and human impacts upon them. The book features diagrams, maps and a glossary to aid understanding of key ideas and suggestions for further reading to allow readers to develop their interest in the subject – making Physical Geography: The Basics the ideal starting point for anyone new to the study of geography and the environment. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Atmospheric Processes and Climate 2. Environmental Change and Carbon 3. Shaping the Land and the Oceans 4. Plant and Animal Distributions. Index April 2011: 198 x 129: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-55929-4: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55930-0: £11.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415559300

Introduction to Process Geomorphology Vijay K. Sharma, Kurukshetra University (retired), India

Introduction to Process Geomorphology provides an integrative approach to the process dynamics and the origin of landforms by the contemporary processes involved in their evolution. The author highlights the physical and chemical laws governing the activity of the earth-surface processes in specific environmental stress conditions and puts forward competing hypotheses on the evolution of landforms, and discusses the bases of internal geologic processes for the explanation of the tectogenic features of the earth.

Landforms also evolve over a long period of cyclic and geologic time, inheriting the imprints of past process rates and/or process domains. The principles and methods of evaluating the signature of environmental change are highlighted in the text by citing suitable studies. The process-form relationships provide the building blocks also for the optimum utilization of the land resources of the earth, and quantitative assessment of the stability of geomorphic systems and the quality of environment. The approach in this part of the text enables readers to gain an in-depth understanding of the application of the principles of geomorphology to the evaluation, planning and management of the earth’s resources for sustainable development. This book discusses process dynamics in quantitative terms and reviews theories on the evolution of landforms that flow from theoretical and empirical data. It offers examples and case studies that enable students to comprehend the related components of processlandform relationships. The review and synthesis of information found in each chapter provides a better understanding of the complexity of still inadequately-understood process activities and the manner of landform evolution. Selected Contents: Process Geomorphology. Geologic Processes and Properties of the Earth Materials. Weathering. Mass Movement. Fluvial Processes. Fluvial Processes and Landforms. Glacial Process and Landforms. Periglacial Processes and Landforms. Aeolian Environment and Landforms. Karst. Coastal Processes and Landforms. Applied Geomorphology. 2010: 235 x 156: 435pp Hb: 978-1-4398-0337-0: £76.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781439803370

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415567756

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

p hy sical ge ography tex tbooks

9th Edition

4th Edition

2nd Edition

Atmosphere, Weather and Climate

Fundamentals of the Physical Environment

Coastal Systems

Roger G. Barry, University of Colorado at Boulder, USA and Richard J. Chorley

Peter Smithson, Ken Addison and Ken Atkinson

Series: Routledge Introductions to Environment

This book presents a comprehensive introduction to weather processes and climatic conditions around the world, their observed variability and changes, and projected future trends. This edition retains its tried and tested structure while incorporating recent advances in the field. It presents a comprehensive coverage of global meteorology and climatology. In this new edition the latest scientific ideas are again expressed in a clear, non-mathematical matter. New features include: • extended and updated treatment of atmospheric models • final chapter on climate variability and change has been completely rewritten to take account of the IPCC 2007 scientific assessment. • new four-colour text design featuring over 30 colour plates • over 360 diagrams have been redrawn in full colour to improve clarity and aid understanding. Atmosphere, Weather and Climate continues to be an indispensable source for all those studying the earth’s atmosphere and world climate, whether from environmental and earth sciences, geography, ecology, agriculture, hydrology, or related disciplinary perspectives. Its pedagogic value is enhanced by several features: learning points at the opening of each chapter and discussion topics at their ending, boxes on topical subjects and on twentieth century advances in the field.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction and History of Meteorology and Climatology 2. Atmospheric Composition, Mass and Structure 3. Solar Radiation and the Global Energy Budget 4. Atmospheric Moisture Budget 5. Atmospheric Instability, Cloud Formation and Precipitation Processes 6. Atmospheric Motion: Principles 7. Planetary-scale Motions in the Atmosphere and Ocean 8. Modelling the Atmospheric Circulation and Climate 9. Mid-latitude Synoptic Systems 10. Weather and Climate in Temperate and High Latitudes 11. Tropical Weather and Climate 12. Boundary Layer Climates 13. Climate Change 2009: 246 x 189: 536pp Hb: 978-0-415-46569-4: £120.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46570-0: £42.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87102-7 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415465700

5th Edition

Environmental Hazards Assessing Risk and Reducing Disaster Keith Smith, University of Stirling, UK, (Emeritus) This is a well-written and generously illustrated overview of all the natural and technological events that threaten humans and what they value. It draws on the latest research across the physical and human sciences and guides students and researchers from problems, theories and policies to explore practical, real-world situations. 2009: 246 x 189: 416pp Hb: 978-0-415-42863-7: £110.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42865-1: £31.99 eBook: 978-0-203-88480-5

’I still believe this book to be the best available introductory level text in the field.’ – Matthew Bampton, University of Southern Maine

’The ideal text for environmental students to provide the foundation they need for understanding how the natural world works. This is plainly superior to standard earth system science treatments used in undergraduate teaching for its easily explored depth of enquiry, for the holistic picture it provides, for the clear graphical treatment of complex topics and for its simple and very natural organization. An overview of this scope and accessibility should be a ’must read’ for everyone concerned about the world’s natural environment.’ – Rick Hazlett, Pomona College, California ’The fourth edition takes this textbook firmly into a global society that is increasingly interested in the effects of climate change. New, updated and modernised chapters on current and future environmental change, weather-forming systems, climate forcing, and polar environments will strengthen its position amongst the top educational resources in physical geography and environmental sciences.’ – Jaco H. Baas, Bangor University This fourth edition has been extensively revised to incorporate current thinking and knowledge and includes: • a new section on the history and study of physical geography • an updated and strengthened chapter on climate change and a strengthened section on the work of the wind • a revised chapter on crysosphere systems – glaciers, ice and permafrost • a new chapter on the principles of environmental reconstruction • a new joint chapter on polar and alpine environments • a key new joint chapter on current environmental change and future environments • new material on the Earth System and cycling of carbon and nutrients

Simon Haslett Coastal Systems offers a concise introduction to the processes, landforms, ecosystems and management of this important global environment. New to the second edition is a greater emphasis on the role of high-energy events, such as storms and tsunamis, which have manifested themselves with catastrophic effects in recent years. There is also a new concluding chapter, and updated guides to the ever-growing coastal literature. Each chapter is illustrated and furnished with topical case studies from around the world. Introductory chapters establish the importance of coasts, and explain how they are studied within a systems framework. Subsequent chapters explore the role of waves, tides, rivers and sea-level change in coastal evolution. Students will benefit from summary points, themed boxes, engaging discussion questions and new graded annotated guides to further reading at the end of each chapter. Additionally, a comprehensive glossary of technical terms and an extensive bibliography are provided. The book is highly illustrated with diagrams and original plates. The comprehensive balance of illustrations and academic thought provides a well balanced view between the role of coastal catastrophes and gradual processes, also examining the impact humans and society have and continue to have on the coastal environment. Selected Contents: 1. Coastal Systems: Definition, Energy and Classification 2. Wave-Dominated Coastal Systems 3. Tidally-Dominated Coastal Systems 4. River-Dominated Coastal Systems 5. Sea-level and the Changing Land-Sea Interface 6. Coastal Management Issues 7. Conclusion 2008: 246 x 174: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-44061-5: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44060-8: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-89320-3 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415440608

9th Edition

Environmental Chemistry

• themed boxes highlighting processes, systems, applications, new developments and human impacts

Stanley E. Manahan, University of Missouri, Columbia, USA

• a support website at www.routledge.com/textbooks/9780415395168 with discussion and essay questions, chapter summaries and extended case studies.

Providing fundamental understanding of environmental chemistry and its applications, this completely revised ninth edition of a bestseller retains the organizational structure that made past editions so popular while updating coverage of principles, tools, and techniques. With clear explanations, real-world examples, and updated questions and answers, the book emphasizes the concepts essential to the practice of environmental science, technology, and chemistry while introducing the newest innovations in the field. Highlights in this edition include sections on aquatic chemistry, the geosphere, transgenic crops, hazardous waste minimization and treatment, and the toxicological chemistry of various classes of chemical substances.

Clearly written, well-structured and with over 450 informative colour diagrams and 150 colour photographs, this text provides students with the necessary grounding in fundamental processes whilst linking these to their impact on human society and their application to the science of the environment. Selected Contents: Part 1: Fundamentals Part 2: Atmosphere Part 3: Geosphere Part 4: Biosphere Part 5: Environments 2008: 276 x 219: 792pp Hb: 978-0-415-39514-4: £120.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39516-8: £37.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415395168

2009: 254 x 178: 783pp Hb: 978-1-4200-5920-5: £36.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781420059205

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415428651

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

p h ys i cal g e og r ap hy te x tbo o k s

Fundamentals of Hydrology

Fundamentals of Fluvial Geomorphology

Tim Davie

Ro Charlton

Series: Routledge Fundamentals of Physical Geography

This book provides a comprehensive overview of recent developments in river channel management, clearly illustrating why an understanding of fluvial geomorphology is vital in channel preservation, environmentally sensitive design and the restoration of degraded river channels.

2nd Edition

Fundamentals of Hydrology is a lively and accessible introduction to the study of hydrology at university level. This new edition continues to provide an understanding of hydrological processes, knowledge of the techniques used to assess water resources and an up-to-date overview of water resource management in a changing world. Throughout the text, wide-ranging examples and case studies are used to clearly explain ideas and methods. Short chapter summaries, essay questions, guides to further reading and a glossary are also included. 2008: 246 x 189: 228pp Hb: 978-0-415-39986-9: £99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39987-6: £28.99 eBook: 978-0-203-93366-4 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415399876

Fundamentals of Fluvial Geomorphology is an indispensable text for undergraduate students. It provides straightforward explanations for important concepts and mathematical formulae, backed up with conceptual diagrams and appropriate examples from around the world to show what they actually mean and why they are important. A colour plate section also shows spectacular examples of fluvial diversity. 2007: 246 x 189: 280pp Hb: 978-0-415-33453-2: £89.00 eBook: 978-0-203-37108-4 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415334532

3rd Edition

Land, Water and Development Sustainable and Adaptive Management of Rivers Malcolm Newson The third edition of Sustainable and Adaptive Management of Rivers follows the same structure as its predecessors, presenting the historical and scientific backgrounds to land-water interactions and establishing the links with development processes and policies. It covers the multitude of scientific research findings, development of ‘tools’ and spatial/temporal scale challenges which have emerged in the last decade. For students of geography, environmental science, hydrology, and development studies this innovative edition provides a reasoned, academic basis of evidence for sustainable, adaptive management of rivers and related large-scale ecosystems using more than 600 new sources. It will also prove invaluable for lecturers and practitioners. 2008: 234 x 156: 480pp Pb: 978-0-415-41946-8: £33.99 eBook: 978-0-203-89191-9 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415419468

Want more information on a book? Visit the direct URL found at the bottom of the title description.

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date

Binding

Isbn

Price

Environmental Chemistry in Society

James M. Beard

2008

Paperback

978-1-4200-8025-4

£46.99

Fundamentals of Hydrology

Tim Davie

2008

Hardback

978-0-415-39986-9

£99.00

Paperback

978-0-415-39987-6

£28.99

e-Book

978-0-203-93366-4

Paperback

978-0-415-33454-9

£26.99

Hardback

978-0-415-33453-2

£89.00

e-Book

978-0-203-37108-4

Fundamentals of Fluvial Geomorphology

Ro Charlton

2007

Chemistry for Environmental and Earth Sciences

Catherine V.A. Duke and C.D. Williams

2007

Paperback

978-0-8493-3934-9

£30.99

Ecosystems

Gordon Dickinson and Kevin Murphy

2007

Paperback

978-0-415-33279-8

£24.99

Hardback

978-0-415-33278-1

£84.00

e-Book

978-0-203-40137-8

Paperback

978-0-415-34300-8

£24.99

Hardback

978-0-415-34299-5

£84.00

e-Book

978-0-203-48228-5

Paperback

978-0-415-27954-3

£28.99

Hardback

978-0-415-27953-6

£95.00

e-Book

978-0-203-49848-4

Paperback

978-0-415-32347-5

£34.99

Hardback

978-0-415-32346-8

£120.00

Paperback

978-0-415-17005-5

£31.99

Hardback

978-0-415-17004-8

£120.00

Paperback

978-0-415-19888-2

£22.99

Hardback

978-0-415-19887-5

£99.00

e-Book

978-0-203-97728-6

Paperback

978-0-7487-4000-0

Biodiversity and Conservation

Science, Philosophy and Physical Geography

Fundamentals of Biogeography Fundamentals of Soils Using Statistics to Understand the Environment

Glaciers

Michael Jeffries

Robert Inkpen and Graham Wilson

Richard Huggett John Gerrard Penny A. Cook and P. Wheater

Peter Knight

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

2005

2004

2004 2000 2000

1999

£33.99

p hy sical ge ography supp leme n tary r e adi n g

Physical Geography Supplementary Reading Physical Geography: The Key Concepts Richard Huggett, University of Manchester, UK Series: Routledge Key Guides Physical Geography: The Key Concepts provides extended definitions of terms that are fundamental to physical geography and its many branches, covering topics ranging from ecology to geomorphology. Complete with informative tables, diagrams, and suggestions for further reading, this is a highly accessible guide for those studying physical geography and related courses. 2009: 216 x 138: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-45207-6: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45208-3: £14.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87567-4 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415452083

Water and the City Risk, Resilience and Planning for a Sustainable Future Iain White, University of Manchester, UK Series: Natural and Built Environment Series As a vital human need, water has been absolutely critical to decisions as to where cities originate, how much they grow and the standard of living of the inhabitants. The relationship is complex however; we need both continual availability and protection from its potential impacts. Over recent decades flooding and scarcity episodes have become commonplace in even the most advanced countries – and these events cannot be disassociated from the socio-economic context within which they occur; being directly related to how we live, where we live and how we govern. This book draws together information on a host of connected subjects from population growth to water scarcity to the relationship between humanity and nature, then demonstrates how utilizing notions of risk and resilience could help improve the relationship between the city and its most precious resource. Combining discussions of risk, water and spatial planning it provides an invaluable text for planning, geography and urban studies students on how to address urban water problems within a rapidly changing world. Selected Contents: Section 1: The Past, Present and Future Context 1. Nature, Climate and Hazard 2. Drivers for Change Section 2: The Problems of Water in the City 3. Too Much Water in the City 4. Too Little Water in the City Section 3: Towards A Conceptual Framework 5. Risk, Resilience and Spatial Planning 6. Principles of Intervention Section 4: Planning for a Sustainable Future 7. Hazard and Resilience in the City 8. Exposure and Resilience in the City 9. Vulnerability and Resilience in the City 10. Towards a more Sustainable City Bibliography 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-55332-2: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55333-9: £29.99

New

2nd Edition

Spatial Statistics

Geographic Data Mining and Knowledge Discovery

GeoSpatial Information Modeling and Thematic Mapping Mohammed A. Kalkhan, Colorado State University, USA Geospatial information modeling and mapping has become an important tool for the investigation and management of natural resources at the landscape scale. Spatial Statistics reviews the types and applications of geospatial information data, such as remote sensing, GIS and GPS, as well as their integration into landscape scale geospatial statistical models and maps. Readers will learn the requirements and limitations of each geospatial tool. With statistical data analysis methods, the text includes laboratory exercises using ArcInfo, ArcGIS, ArcView, and other popular software for geospatial modeling. It also features case studies with examples, homework problems, and a solutions manual. Selected Contents: Data Types. Sampling Methods and Applications. Geospatial Information Technology. Scale and Spatial Pattern. Geospatial Analysis and Modeling-Mapping. Variogram and Kriging. Binary Classification Trees. Co-Kriging. April 2011: 235 x 156: 188pp Hb: 978-1-4200-6976-1: £33.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781420069761

Forthcoming

Geoinformatics in Applied Geomorphology Edited by Siddan Anbazhagan, Periyar University, Salem, India, S.K. Subramanian, National Remote Sensing Centre, Balanagar, India and Xiaojun Yang, Florida State University, Tallahassee, Florida, USA This book provides an overview of geoinformatics and current trends. It discusses airborne laser scanning in geomorphic mapping and groundwater exploration and management. Other topics discussed include shoreline changes and coastal zone management, micromorphological changes in tsunami-effected areas, desert environmental mapping, and geoinformatics in neotectonism. The self-contained chapters begin with basic aspects, follow with geoinformatics application, and finish with relevant case studies. Figures, photographs, tables, and equations are included. June 2011: 229 x 152: 400pp Hb: 978-1-4398-3048-2: £82.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781439830482

Edited by Harvey J. Miller, University of Utah, Salt Lake City, USA and Jiawei Han, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, USA Series: Chapman & Hall/CRC Data Mining and Knowledge Discovery Series This second edition it includes updated material on geographic knowledge discovery, geographic data warehouse research, map cubes, spatial dependency, spatial clustering methods, clustering techniques for trajectory data, INGENS 2.0, and geovisualization techniques. Recognizing the growth in mobile technologies and trajectory data, this edition provides five new chapters on knowledge discovery from spatiotemporal and mobile objects databases. It also contains new chapters on data quality issues, medoid computation, geographically weighted regression, and an integrated approach to multivariate analysis and geovisualization. 2009: 235 x 156: 486pp Hb: 978-1-4200-7397-3: £58.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781420073973

Polar Microbiology The Ecology, Biodiversity and Bioremediation Potential of Microorganisms in Extremely Cold Environments Edited by Asim K. Bej, University of Alabama at Birmingham, USA, Jackie Aislabie, Landcare Research, Hamilton, New Zealand and Ronald M. Atlas, University of Louisville, Kentucky, USA The only book to cover the breadth of microbial ecology and diversity in polar regions with an emphasis on bioremediation, Polar Microbiology examines polar microorganisms and their ability to degrade petroleum hydrocarbon contaminants in polar terrestrial and aquatic environments. Providing a unique perspective of these microorganisms in extremely cold temperatures, the book focuses on their taxonomy, physiology, biochemistry, population structure, bioremediation potential, and potential for biotechnology applications. Leading investigators provide complete coverage of the microbiology relevant to the study of biodiversity and biodegradation of pollutants in the Arctic and Antarctic. 2009: 235 x 156: 424pp Hb: 978-1-4200-8384-2: £102.00 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781420083842

Advanced Geoinformation Science Edited by Chaowei Yang, David Wong, Qianjun Miao and Ruixin Yang all at George Mason University, Virginia, USA With pioneering editors and expert contributors, Advanced Geoinformation Science explores how certain technical aspects of geoinformation have been used and could be used to address such global issues such as tsunamis, hurricanes, economic crises, epidemics, and emergency responses. Enhanced with color illustrations, live examples such as GOS and AirNow, and insights from NASA, EPA, and USGS, the book delineates the problems communities are likely to face and explains how advanced geoinformation science can be a part of their solution. 2010: 235 x 156: 525pp Hb: 978-1-4398-1060-6: £95.00 • eBook: 978-1-4398-1061-3 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781439810606

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415553339

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

phys i cal g e og r ap h y s upp l e me n tary r e ad i n g

Geomatics Engineering A Practical Guide to Project Design Clement A. Ogaja, California State University, Fresno, USA Traditionally, land surveyors experience years of struggle as they encounter the complexities of project planning and design processes in the course of professional employment or practice. Giving beginners a leg up and working professionals added experience, Geomatics Engineering: A Practical Guide to Project Design provides a practical guide to contemporary issues in geomatics professionalism, ethics, and design. It explores issues they face on a daily basis during the project design and the request for proposal process commonly used for soliciting professional geomatics engineering services. Organized into four sections, designed to develop critical thinking and problem solving, this book: • reflects the natural progression of project design considerations, including how the planning, information gathering, design, scheduling, cost estimating, and proposal writing fit into the overall scheme of project design process • presents the details of contemporary issues such as standards and specifications, professional and ethical responsibilities, and policy, social, and environmental issues that are pertinent to geomatics engineering projects • demonstrates the important considerations when planning or designing new projects

2nd Edition

New

Manual of Geospatial Science and Technology

Advances in Environmental Remote Sensing

Edited by John D. Bossler, the Ohio State University, Dublin, USA, Robert B. McMaster, Chris Rizos, University of New South Wales, Australia and James B. Campbell, The Ohio State University, Dublin, USA

Sensors, Algorithms, and Applications

Following in the tradition of its popular predecessor, the Manual of Geospatial Science and Technology continues to be the authoritative volume that covers all aspects of the field, both basic and applied, and includes a focus on initiating, planning, and managing GIS projects. This comprehensive resource, which contains contributions from fifty-three leading experts and professors in the areas of GIS, GPS, and remote sensing, reflects the very latest advances in the technology, applications, and usage of the geospatial sciences in many key disciplines, from natural resource analysis to transportation planning. Significantly updated and expanded, this reader-friendly manual introduces the fundamentals in mathematics and physics needed to perform area-wide mapping, inventory, data conversion, and analysis. The text maintains a focus on the practical aspects of these technologies and remains the only resource to cover the areas of GIS, GPS, and remote sensing with such breadth and clarity. An expanded index, new and revised figures, a color insert, and an easier to read format are among the many improvements to this edition.

• focuses on the proposal development process and shows how to put together a project cost estimate, including estimating quantities and developing unit and lump-sum costs.

New features include:

Based on experience of past projects, the book identifies priority areas of attention for planning new projects. Presenting the nuts and bolts of geomatics projects, the author provides an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility, the impact of engineering solutions in a global and social context, as well as a host of other contemporary issues such as budgetary and scheduling constraints.

• coverage of GIS applications in automobile navigation and enterprise-wide applications

Selected Contents: Part 1: Overview. Project Design Process. Part 2: Contemporary Issues. Standards and Specifications. Professional and Ethical Responsibilities. Policy, Social and Environmental Issues. Part 3: Planning and Design. Boundary Surveys. Control Surveys. Topographic Surveys. Enterprise GIS. Part 4: Propsal Development. Writing Geomatics Proposals. Case Example: Land Surveying of Highway Corridor. Case Example: Boundary Survey for Land Development. Case Example: Aerial Surveying and Mapping. Case Example: Topographic GIS Base Map. Appendix 1: RFPS for Geomatics Projects. Appendix 2: Resource Guide for Geomatics Projects. 2010: 235 x 156: 296pp Hb: 978-1-4398-1743-8: £63.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781439817438

• revised chapters reflecting the changes that have occurred in the technology, applications, and usage of geospacial science

• a new chapter devoted to basic statistics and least squares solutions • expanded international scope that addresses the other Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS), including the Russian Federation system (GLONASS), the Chinese system (COMPASS), and the European space agency system (GALILEO) • a new chapter covering Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR) • a new chapter that addresses privacy issues, legal concerns, and the emerging field of public participation GIS (PPGIS) • new material on the expanding field of geovisualization. The text presents many real-world applications, including road map navigation using GPS, as well as problems associated with mapping, inventory of land parcels, and data analysis. Complete with helpful references, decision making tools, and many new case studies, this time-saving resource provides the practical understanding required to harness the potential of these dynamic technologies. Selected Contents: Prerequisites. Global Positioning System. Geographic Information Systems. Applications.

Edited by Qihao Weng, Indiana State University, USA Series: Remote Sensing Applications Series

Generating a satisfactory classification image from remote sensing data is not a straightforward task. Many factors contribute to this difficulty including the characteristics of a study area, availability of suitable remote sensing data, ancillary and ground reference data, proper use of variables and classification algorithms, and the analyst’s experience. An authoritative text, Advances in Environmental Remote Sensing: Sensors, Algorithms, and Applications compiles comprehensive review articles to examine the developments in concepts, methods, techniques, and applications as well as focused articles and case studies on the latest on a particular topic. Divided into four sections, the first deals with various sensors, systems, or sensing operations using different regions of wavelengths. Drawing on the data and lessons learned from the U.S. Landsat remote sensing programs, it reviews key concepts, methods, and practical uses of particular sensors/sensing systems. Section two presents new developments in algorithms and techniques, specifically in image preprocessing, thematic information extraction, and digital change detection. It gives correction algorithms for hyperspectral, thermal, and multispectral sensors, discusses the combined method for performing topographic and atmospheric corrections, and provides examples of correcting non-standard atmospheric conditions, including haze, cirrus, and cloud shadow. Section three focuses on remote sensing of vegetation and related features of the Earth’s surface. It reviews advancements in the remote sensing of ecosystem structure, process, and function, and notes important trade-offs and compromises in characterizing ecosystems from space related to spatial, spectral, and temporal resolutions of the imaging sensors. It discusses the mismatch between leaf-level and species-level ecological variables and satellite spatial resolutions and the resulting difficulties in validating satellite-derived products. Finally, section four examines developments in the remote sensing of air, water, and other terrestrial features, reviews MODIS algorithms for aerosol retrieval at both global and local scales, and demonstrates the retrieval of aerosol optical thickness (AOT). This section rounds out coverage with a look at remote sensing approaches to measure the urban environment and examines the most important concepts and recent research.

2010: 235 x 156: 854pp Hb: 978-1-4200-8733-8: £121.00

February 2011: 254 x 178: 610pp Hb: 978-1-4200-9175-5: £95.00 eBook: 978-1-4200-9181-6

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781420087338

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781420091755

Order Yours Today! For simple and secure online ordering, please visit www.routledge.com/geography Or use the order form at the back of this catalog.

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

p hy sical ge ography referen c e

Physical Geography Reference Forthcoming

Forthcoming

4 Volume Set

The Routledge Handbook of Hazards and Disaster Risk Reduction

Future Climate Change Edited by Mark Maslin and Samuel Randalls, both at University College London, UK

Edited by Ben Wisner, Oberlin College, USA, J.C. Gaillard, University of Grenoble, France and Ilan Kelman, Center for International Climate and Environmental Research, Norway

Series: Critical Concepts in the Environment Serious scholarship on future climate change flourishes now as it has never done before, and this new title, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a vast literature-and the continuing explosion in research output. The first volume (’Science’) in the collection deals with the development of the science of global warming and climate change, starting with Tyndall (1861), through to the IPCC synthesis (2007), and ending with the very latest research. Volume two (‘Impact Assessments’), meanwhile, assembles the best thinking on how the potential physical, biological, social-political, and economic impacts of climate change are assessed. This volume also includes material on potential surprises that science is starting to investigate, such as the rapid melting of the Greenland and Western Antarctic ice sheets, die back of the Amazon rainforest, release of gas hydrates, and other tipping points. The third volume (‘Politics and Solutions’) gathers the most influential research on climate-change solutions; it encompasses global and local politics, engineering, renewable energy, and geoengineering. The final volume in the collection (‘Framing the Debate’) brings together key scholarship to question and explore how the climate-change debate has been framed and reframed as a scientific, economic, security, health, development, geopolitical, ethical, and cultural issue. Future Climate Change is an essential collection destined to be welcomed as a vital research resource by all scholars and students of the subject. August 2011: 234 x 156: 1600pp Hb: 978-0-415-56981-1: £685.00

The Handbook provides a comprehensive statement and reference point for hazard and disaster research, policy making, and practice in an international and multi-disciplinary context. It offers critical reviews and appraisals of current state-of-the-art and future development of conceptual, theoretical and practical approaches as well as empirical knowledge and available tools. The engaging international contributions reflect upon the politics and policy of how we think about and practice applied hazard research and disaster risk reduction. This Handbook provides a wealth of interdisciplinary information and will appeal to students and practitioners interested in Geography, Environment Studies and Development Studies. Selected Contents: Section 1: Big Picture Views – Hazards, Vulnerabilities and Capacities Section 2: Fine-Grained Views – Hazards, Vulnerabilities and Capacities Section 3: Preparedness and Response Section 4: Planning, Prevention and Mitigation Section 5: Conclusion July 2011: 246 x 189: 776pp Hb: 978-0-415-59065-5: £150.00 • eBook: 978-0-203-84423-6 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415590655

3rd Edition

For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415569811

The Everglades Handbook

New

Understanding the Ecosystem, Third Edition

2nd Edition

Thomas E. Lodge, Thomas E. Lodge Ecological Advisors, Inc., Florida, USA

Practical Handbook for Wetland Identification and Delineation

Completely revised, updated, and now with color photographs and illustrations in every chapter, The Everglades Handbook provides a breadth and depth of information on the entire ecosystem of the Everglades that cannot be found anywhere else. Written by Thomas Lodge, one of the most respected authorities on the Everglades and one of its most ardent protectors, the book provides an explanation of what the Everglades is, how it has been changed, and the restoration needed to bring back ecological functions and safeguard sustainable future uses of the region by people.

John G. Lyon and Lynn Krise Lyon both at Clifton, Virginia, USA Series: Mapping Science Describing wetlands, their functions, and a variety of assessment methods, this new edition of a bestseller offers solutions to real-world problems and covers important subjects including methods for the identification and delineation of wetland boundaries and the evaluation of wetlands using aerial photography. It covers indicators of hydrological, chemical, and biological processes and presents information on soil surveys and plant measurements. Fully revised and updated, this edition provides additional content on wetland permits and regulations, legal considerations, and updated mapping and surveying techniques. Selected Contents: Introduction. Background. Methods. Additional Background and Details. Additional Methods and Considerations. The Permit Process. Regulatory and Legal-Related Issues for the Layperson. Discussion. Conclusions. Bibliography. Appendices. March 2011: 235 x 156: 210pp Hb: 978-1-4398-3891-4: £76.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781439838914

This edition maintains Lodge’s trademark style, making the book appealing to students, the general public, scientists, and managers. A bestseller in each edition since its publication in 1994, this is quite possibly the most attractive, readable science book available on the Everglades. Selected Contents: Background. An Ecosystem Overview-What Is (or Are?) the Everglades? The Everglades in Space and Time. Environments of the Everglades Region. Freshwater Marshes. Tree Islands. Tropical Hardwood Hammocks. Pinelands. The Big Cypress Swamp. Mangrove Swamps. Coastal Lowland Vegetation ... and Hurricanes! Coastal Estuarine and Marine Waters. Lake Okeechobee and the Everglades Headwaters. Peripheral Ecosystems of the Everglades. The Flora and Fauna of Southern Florida. Origins of the Flora and Fauna. Invertebrates. Freshwater Fishes. Marine and Estuarine Fishes. Amphibians. Reptiles. Mammals. Birds. Synthesis-Ecological Relationships and Processes in the Everglades Region. Environmental Impacts. Man and the Everglades. References. Index. 2010: 254 x 178: 422pp Hb: 978-1-4398-0262-5: £38.99 For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9781439802625

backlist Title

Author/Editor

Date Binding

Isbn

Price

Principles of Modeling Uncertainties in Spatial Data and Spatial Analyses

Wenzhong Shi

2009

Hardback

978-1-4200-5927-4

£85.00

Representing, Modeling, and Visualizing the Natural Environment

Edited by Nick Mount, Gemma Harvey, Paul Aplin and Gary Priestnall

2008

Hardback

978-1-4200-5549-8

£96.00

Dynamics of Forest Ecosystems in Central Africa During the Holocene: Past – Present – Future

Edited by J. Runge

2007

Hardback

978-0-415-42617-6

£99.00

The Natural History of Earth

Richard John Huggett

2006

Hardback

978-0-415-35802-6

£110.00

e-Book

978-0-203-00407-4

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

i n d ex

index A Achieving Education for All through Public–Private Partnerships?. . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Adams, Rob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Adams, W.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Adaptation to Climate Change. . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Addison, Ken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adey, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Advanced Geoinformation Science. . . . . . . . . 52 Advances in Environmental Remote Sensing. . 53 Advances in Tourism (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Africa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Agnew, Clive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Ahmed, Waquar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Airey, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Aislabie, Jackie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Aitken, Stuart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 AlSayyad, Nezar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Amazonian Geographies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 American Urban Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Amoroso, Nadia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Anbazhagan, Siddan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Anderson, David A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Anderson, Ewan W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Anderson, Jon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Anderson, Liam D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Andersson, Jan Otto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Anthamatten, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Asian Cities, Migrant Labor and Contested Spaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Ateljevic, Irena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Atkinson, Ken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Atlas of Middle Eastern Affairs, An. . . . . . . . . . 4 Atlas, Ronald M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Atmosphere, Weather and Climate. . . . . . . . . 50

B Banerjee, Tridib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Barnett, Jonathan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Barrett, Christopher B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Barrett, Heather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Barry, Roger G.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Basics (series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 49 Basin Focal Projects, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Beall, Jo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Beatley, Timothy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Beaverstock, Jonathan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 10 Bej, Asim K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Bender, Thomas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Benton-Short, Lisa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Binns, Tony. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Bioregionalism and Global Ethics. . . . . . . . . . . 47 Birch, Eugénie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Biswas, Asit K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Blomley, Nicholas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Borlik, Todd A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Borras Jr., Saturnino M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Bosco, Fernando. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Bossler, John D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Boucekkine, Raouf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Boys and Their Schooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Bradshaw, Michael J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Bristow, Gillian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Brunn, Stanley D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Bryson, John R.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Bullivant, Andrea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

C Campbell, James B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Carbon Responsibility and Embodied Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Cason, Jeffrey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Caves, Roger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Chambers, Donna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Chapman & Hall/CRC Data Mining and Knowledge Discovery Series (series). . . . . . . 52 Charlesworth, Esther. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Charlton, Ro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Chigara, Ben. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Children, Youth and the City. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 China and Africa Development Relations. . . . . 40 Chinatowns in a Transnational World . . . . . . . 22 Chong, King. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Chorley, Richard J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Cities and Cinema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cities and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Cities and Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Cities and Gender. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Cities and Nature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cities and Sexualities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Cities and Suburbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cities, Politics & Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 City Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 City Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Climate Change and the Crisis of Capitalism. . 45 Cloke, Jonathan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Coastal Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Coles, Tim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Collins, Andrew E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Colomb, Claire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Comedia (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Companion to Urban Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Comtois, Claude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Conducting Research in Conservation. . . . . . . 42 Conflict and Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Confronting Climate Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Connolly, James . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Contemporary Geographies of Leisure, Tourism and Mobility (series). . . . 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 Contesting Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Contributions from the Rosenberg International Forum on Water Policy (series). . . . . . . . . . . 35 Conzen, Michael P.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Cook, Simon E.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Cool, Ian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Cooperation Challenge of Economics and the Protection of Water Supplies, The. . . . . . . . 46 Corey, Steven H.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Cowell, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Critical Agrarian Studies (series). . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Critical Concepts in the Environment (series). . . 54 Critical Concepts in Urban Studies (series). . . . 23 Critical Reflections on Regional Competitiveness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Critical Social Thought (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Critical Turn in Tourism Studies, The . . . . . . . . 28 Cullingworth, J. Barry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Cultural Geography Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Cultural Heritage and Tourism in the Developing World. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Culture and the Environment in the Himalaya. . . 39 Cuthbert, Alexander. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

D Daniels, Peter W.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 21 Daniels, Stephen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Davie, Tim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Dawson, Jackie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 De Lucia, Caterina. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 De Souza E Silva, Adriana. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Dear, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Delaney, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 DeLyser, Dydia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Dent, Christopher M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Desfor, Gene. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Design Economies and the Changing World Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Development and Globalization . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Development in Practice Books (series) . . . . . . 37 Diekmann, Anya. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Complimentary Exam Copy

Disaster and Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Dispossession and Resistance in India . . . . . . . 39 Disrupted Cities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Distributed Urbanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Dixon, Alan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Dodge, Martin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Domingos, Tiago M. D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Douglas, Ian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Dühr, Stefanie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Duval, David Timothy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

E Eagle, Christine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Ecocriticism and Early Modern English Literature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 EcoEdge, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Economic Geography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Economics and Development Studies . . . . . . . 32 Economics as Social Theory (series). . . . . . . . . 35 Economics of Industrial Development, The . . . 36 Economics of Tourism, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Ecosystem Services and Global Trade of Natural Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Edensor, Tim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 16 Elements of Ecological Economics. . . . . . . . . . 43 Elliott, Jennifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Entrepreneurship, Innovation and Regional Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Entrikin, J Nicholas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Environment and Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Environment and Food. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Environment Encyclopedia and Directory 2010, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Environment, Media and Communication. . . . 41 Environmental Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Environmental Criticism for the Twenty-First Century. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Environmental Economics and Natural Resource Management Third Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Environmental Efficiency, Innovation and Economic Performances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Environmental Governance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Environmental Hazards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Environmental History of the World, An . . . . . 42 Environmental Justice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Environmental Policies for Air Pollution and Climate Change in the New Europe. . . . . . . 46 Environmental Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Envisioning Landscapes, Making Worlds. . . . . . 7 Eriksson, Ralf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Europa Politics of ... Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Europa Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 European Spatial Planning and Territorial Cooperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Evanoff, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Evans, James. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Events and Urban Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Everglades Handbook, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Exposed City, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

F Farías, Ignacio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Faulconbridge, James R.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fieldwork in Tourism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Filep, Sebastian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Fisher, Myles J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Flint, Colin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Food and Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Forestry Economics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Fox, Sean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Frew, Elspeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Friedmann, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Frith, Jordan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Frost, Warwick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Fundamentalist City?, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Fundamentals of Fluvial Geomorphology. . . . . 51 Fundamentals of Geomorphology. . . . . . . . . . 49

Fundamentals of Hydrology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Fundamentals of the Physical Environment. . . 50 Future Climate Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

G Gadsby, Helen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Gaillard, JC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Gamburd, Michele R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Garcia-Valiñas, Maria A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Garrido, Alberto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Gender and Agrarian Reforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Gender and Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Geographic Data Mining and Knowledge Discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Geographies of Children, Youth and Families. . . 8 Geographies of Developing Areas. . . . . . . . . . 30 Geographies of Globalization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Geographies of the New Economy . . . . . . . . . 10 Geography of Transport Systems, The. . . . . . . . 4 GeoHumanities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Geoinformatics in Applied Geomorphology. . . 52 Geomatics Engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Global Learning and Sustainable Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Global Political Ecology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Globalisation and Migration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Globalization of Advertising, The . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Globalization, Modernity and the City. . . . . . . 21 Gold, John R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 23 Gold, Margaret M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 23 Good City, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Goode, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Gottiener, Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Gould, W.T.S.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Graham, Nicole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Graham, Stephen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Green Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Grin, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Guneratne, Arjun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Gutiérrez-Rodríguez, Encarnación. . . . . . . . . . . 9

H Haldrup, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Hall, C. Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 27, 28 Hall, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Hall, Tim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Han, Jiawei. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Handbook of Hazards and Disaster Risk Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Handbook of Local and Regional Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Hanlon, Bernadette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Hannam, Kevin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Hansen, Anders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Haslett, Simon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Hazen, Helen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Herman, Thomas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Herod, Andrew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hiltner, Ken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Ho, Kong Chong. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Hoffman, Joan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Holden, Andrew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Holden, Joseph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Hollander, Justin B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Holt, Louise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Hopkins, Peter E.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Horschelmann, Kathrin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Hou, Jeffrey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Houck, Mike. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Hritonenko, Natali. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Hubbard, Phil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Huggett, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 52 Hughes, J. Donald. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Human Geography: The Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Humphreys, Matthew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Hutton, Thomas A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

index

Improving Water Policy and Governance. . . . . 48 India’s New Economic Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Industrialisation and Rural Livelihoods in China. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Ingram, Helen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Insurgencies: Essays in Planning Theory. . . . . . 18 Insurgent Public Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Introduction to Geopolitics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Introduction to Process Geomorphology. . . . . 49 Introduction to Sustainable Development, An. . . 31 Introduction to the Geography of Health, An. . . 2 Introduction to Visual Research Methods in Tourism, An. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Isaacson, Michal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Issues in Cultural Tourism Studies . . . . . . . . . . 25

MacGinty, Roger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Macintyre, Alison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Madanipour, Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Making of Olympic Cities, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Making of the American Landscape, The. . . . . . 3 Managing Adaptation to Climate Risk. . . . . . . 44 Managing in Developing Countries. . . . . . . . . 35 Manahan, Stanley E.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Manual of Geospatial Science and Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Mapping Science (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Marcuse, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Marques, Alexandra P.S.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Marshall, Stephen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Martinez-Fernandez, Cristina . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Maslin, Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Massoumi, Mejgan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Mathematics for the Environment. . . . . . . . . . 47 Mayer, Ruth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Mazzanti, Massimiliano. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 McEwan, Cheryl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 McGilvray, Dennis B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 McMaster, Robert B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 McMichael, Philip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 47 Mega Tourist Metropolises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Mele, Christopher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Mennel, Barbara. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Meth, Paula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Miao, Qianjun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Middle East Today, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Migration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Migration, Domestic Work and Affect. . . . . . . . 9 Miller, Harvey J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Millington, Steve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Minca, Claudio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Mitra, Jay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Mobile Interfaces in Public Spaces. . . . . . . . . . 22 Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Momsen, Janet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 33 Montini, Anna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Morgan, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Morgan, Nigel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Munck, Ronaldo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Murray, Warwick. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

J Jacobs, Allan B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Jacobs, Susie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Jarvis, Helen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Jayne, Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Jones, Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

K Kalkhan, Mohammed A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Kanji, Nazneen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Kantor, Paula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Kaufman, Ned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Kay, Tess. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Kelman, Ilan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Kesby, Mike . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Ketchum, Jim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Key Ideas in Geography (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Kindon, Sara. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Kingstone, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Kitchin, Rob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Knox, Dan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Knox, Paul L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Köllner, Thomas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Krissoff Boehm, Lisa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Kundu, Amitabh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Künnemann, Vanessa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

L Laidley, Jennefer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Land and Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Land, Water and Development. . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Larsen, Jonas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Last Chance Tourism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Latin American Economic Development . . . . . 36 Lawscape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 LeGates, Richard T.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Lemelin, Raynald Harvey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 LeMenager, Stephanie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Leslie, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Leslie, Deborah. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Lever-Tracy, Constance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Lew, Alan A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Lewis, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Leyshon, Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Lim, CJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Lin, Jan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Lingohr-Wolf, Susanne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Lipman, Pauline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Liu, Ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Lloyd, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Lodge, Thomas E.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Loukaitou-Sideris, Anastasia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Luria, Sarah. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Lyon, John G.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Lyon, Lynn Krise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

N Nadin, Vincent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Nativel, Corinne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Natural and Built Environment Series. . . . . 13, 52 Navarrete, David Manuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Nel, Etienne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Neo-Bohemia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 New Economic Spaces in Asian Cities . . . . . . . 21 New Perspectives in Tourism Geographies. . . . 28 New Political Economy of Urban Education, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Newing, Helen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Newson, Malcolm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Nilsen, Alf Gunvald. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Nixson, Frederick. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Non-Governmental Organizations and Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Novy, Johannes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Nyaupane, Gyan P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

O Oakes, Tim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Oakes, Timothy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 O’Brien, Geoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Ogaja, Clement A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 O’Keefe, Phil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Olivo, Ingrid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Olympic Cities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Optimal Control of Age-structured Populations in Economy, Demography, and the Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Overseas Research II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Owens, Susan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

P Pacione, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Padayachee, Vishnu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Pain, Rachel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Pallagst, Karina M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Papatheodorou, Andreas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Parker, Simon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Participation in Environmental Organizations. . 46 Participatory Action Research Approaches and Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Pearce, Philip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Peet, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 42 Pelling, Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45 Perkins, Chris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Physical Geography: The Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Physical Geography: The Key Concepts. . . . . . 52 Pike, Andy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Piper, Jake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Place, Race, and Story. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Planning in the USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Planning, History and Environment Series. . . . 19 Polar Microbiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Political Economy of Africa, The . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Political Economy of Latin America, The . . . . . 38 Politics of Biofuels, Land and Agrarian Change, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Politics of Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Population and Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Postcolonialism and Development. . . . . . . . . . 34 Potter, Cuz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Poverty Capital. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Practical Handbook for Wetland Identification and Delineation, Second Edition . . . . . . . . . 54 Price, Patricia L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Pritchard, Annette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Punnett, Betty Jane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Puri, Rajindra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Q Questioning Cities (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

R Raki, Tijana. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Randalls, Samuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Rantisi, Norma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Real Tourism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Redclift, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Reitano, Joanne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Religion and Tourism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Remote Sensing Applications Series . . . . . . . . 53 Rennie Short, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Restless City Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Restless City, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Rethinking Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Reyes, Javier A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Richardson, Doug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Rigg, Jonathan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Rights of Passage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Rizos, Chris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Robbins, Paul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Roberts, Jane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Roberts, Susan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Rodrigue, Jean-Paul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Rodrigues, João F. D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Rodriguez-Pose, Andres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Rose, Pauline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Ross, Glenn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Rotmans, Jan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Routledge Advances in Geography (series) . . . 22

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/geography

Routledge Advances in South Asian Studies (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Routledge Advances in Tourism (series). . . . . . 27 Routledge Atlas of Central Eurasian Affairs, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Routledge Contemporary Asia Series. . . . . . . . 21 Routledge Contemporary China Series . . . 39, 40 Routledge Contemporary Human Geography Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 12 Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series. . . 39 Routledge Critical Introductions to Urbanism and the City (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 16 Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Routledge Fundamentals of Physical Geography (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Routledge Handbook of Urban Ecology, The . . 23 Routledge Interdisciplinary Perspectives on Literature (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Routledge International Studies of Women and Place (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Routledge Introductions to Environment (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41, 50 Routledge Key Guides (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Routledge Perspectives on Development (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 32, 33, 34 Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Routledge Research in Education (series). . . . . 11 Routledge Research in Gender and Society (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Routledge Studies in Development and Society (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Routledge Studies in Ecological Economics (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Routledge Studies in Human Geography (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 9, 10, 21, 45 Routledge Studies in Physical Education and Youth Sport (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Routledge Studies in Renaissance Literature and Culture (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Routledge Studies in Sustainability Transitions (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Routledge Textbooks in Environmental and Agricultural Economics (series). . . . . . . . . . . 44 Routledge Urban Reader Series. . . . . . 11, 12, 15 Roy, Ananya. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 RTPI Library Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 18 Ruccio, David F.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Rural. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Rusten, Grete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

S Saarinen, Jarkko. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Sage, Colin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Samers, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Sawyer, W. Charles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Scheyvens, Regina. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Schmid, Heiko. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Schmink, Marianne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Schot, Johan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Schubert, Dirk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Scoones, Ian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Scott Cato, Molly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Searching for the Just City. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Sharma, Vijay K.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Sharpley, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Shaw, Gareth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Shewry, Teresa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Short, John Rennie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 21 Shortcuts (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Shoval, Noam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Shrinking Cities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Simpson, Tim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Sinclair, M. Thea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Slack, Brian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Smartcities and Eco-Warriors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Smith, Andrew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

i n d ex

Smith, Keith. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Smith, Melanie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Smithson, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Social Justice (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Southern African Development Community Land Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Spaces of Vernacular Creativity. . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Spatial Planning and Climate Change . . . . . . . 13 Spatial Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Spatial, the Legal and the Pragmatics of World-Making, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Stabler, Mike J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Stanley, Neil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Stausberg, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Steil, Justin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Stevens, Quentin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Stewart, Dona. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Stewart, Emma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Stone, Philip R.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Storey, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Stout, Frederic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Studentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Guide to Writing Dissertations and Theses in Tourism Studies and Related Disciplines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Studies in Philosophy (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Subramanian, S.K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Sumner, Andy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Sunburnt Cities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Sustainability in European Transport Policy . . . 48 Sustainable Urban Development Reader. . . . . 15 Swanson, Kate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

T Tallon, Andrew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 23 Taylor, Peter J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Teaching Contemporary Themes in Secondary Education (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Teaching Secondary Geography as if the Planet Matters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Teaching... as if the Planet Matters (series) . . . . 7 Teletechnologies, Place and Community . . . . . . 9 Territories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Tewdwr-Jones, Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Theories and Practices of Development. . . . . . 31 ThirdWorlds (series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Timothy, Dallen J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Tomaney, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Toops, Stanley. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Torgler, Benno. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Torres, Rebecca Maria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tortajada, Cecilia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Tourism and Agriculture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tourism and Change in Polar Regions. . . . . . . 28 Tourism and India. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Tourism and National Identities. . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tourism and National Parks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Tourism and Poverty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Tourism Enterprises and Sustainable Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Tourism Geography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tourism in China. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tourism, Performance and the Everyday . . . . . 27 Tourism, Poverty and Development in the Developing World. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tourist Cities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Tourist Experience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Tourist Mobility and Advanced Tracking Technologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Tourists, Tourism and the Good Life . . . . . . . . 27 Transforming Urban Waterfronts. . . . . . . . . . . 22 Transitions to Sustainable Development. . . . . 45 Tribe, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Tsunami Recovery in Sri Lanka. . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

U Understanding and Managing Tourism Impacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Understanding Cities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Complimentary Exam Copy

Understanding Cultural Geography. . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding Sport in International Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Urban and Regional Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Urban and Regional Planning Reader, The. . . . 15 Urban Assemblages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Urban Coding and Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Urban Geography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Urban Regeneration and Renewal. . . . . . . . . . 23 Urban Regeneration in the UK . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Urban Sociology Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Urban Theory Beyond the West. . . . . . . . . . . . 16

V Vadjunec, Jacqueline M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 van Blerk, Lorraine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Vicino, Thomas J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

W Wagner, John E.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Walker, Gordon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Walter, Martin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Wang, Rusong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Water and the City. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Water for Food in a Changing World. . . . . . . . 35 Water Resources and Development. . . . . . . . . 32 Watson, C.W.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Watts, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Weber, Heloise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Weiss, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Weng, Qihao . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Wheeler, Stephen M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Whelen, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 White, Iain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 White, Leanne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Whose Public Space? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Wiechmann, Thorsten. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Wilken, Rowan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Wilkins, Gretchen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Williams, Andrew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Williams, Glyn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Williams, Stephen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Willis, Katie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31 Wilson, Elizabeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Wilson, Julie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Wisner, Ben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Wolf and Stanley on Environmental Law. . . . . 45 Wolf, Susan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Wong, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Wong, Tai-Chee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Wood, Andrew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Woodhouse, Philip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Woods, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Y Yang, Chaowei. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Yang, Ruixin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Yang, Xiaojun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Yatsenko, Yuri. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Young, Liz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Young People, Border Spaces and Revolutionary Imaginations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Young People, Place and Identity . . . . . . . . . . . 4

e-Inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Order your books today...

Qty Title

ISBN

Price

Please use this form to order directly from us. If for any reason you are not satisfied with a book ordered directly from us, simply return it in saleable condition within 30 days (UK) or 60 days (Europe) and we will refund you the cost of the book. Prices and publication dates are correct at time of going to press, but may be subject to change without notice. All prices are net in the UK. Alternatively, contact your regular supplier.

FREEPOST: Taylor & Francis Group Bookpoint (T&F) Freepost RRXG-BBUL-LAER Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4SB

(Please affix stamp if posting from outside UK.)

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

ORDER ONLINE

5% of total order (£1 min charge, £10 max charge). Next day delivery +£6.50*

Europe:

10% of total order (£2.95 min charge, £20 max charge). Next day delivery +£6.50*

Please tick if you would like to receive more information on our standing order system.

ISBN: 978-0-418-24811-9

GEOG1103

A B C D E Please turn overleaf to complete ‘Your Details’ and ‘Method of Payment’

complimentary exam request To order a complimentary exam copy, please contact us using one of the methods below.

Order your books from

online: www.routledge.com/info/compcopy

and receive FREE postage & packaging when spending £20 or more. (in UK only)

email:

geography@routledge.com

Fax:

+44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com

TOTAL

*We only guarantee next day delivery for orders received before noon.

online: www.routledge.com

AND RECEIVE FREE P&P!

UK:

Rest of World: 15% of total order (£6.50 min charge, £30 max charge).

email: geography@routledge.com

ebooks: www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

P&P

postage & packaging

telephone (credit cards): +44 (0)1235 400524

library recommendation I recommend you purchase this/these book(s): Title: Author:

ISBN: Price:

Title: Author:

ISBN: Price:

Title: Author:

ISBN: Price:

Title: Author:

ISBN: Price:

Please turn overleaf to complete your recommendation form

www.routledge.com/geography

ORDER ONLINE

Method of Payment – Please tick and/or fill relevant boxes and select card type.

AND RECEIVE FREE P&P! Please send me a pre-payment invoice. My Reference Number is: __________________________________________________

Order your books from

I enclose a cheque (made payable to Taylor & Francis) for £ ____________________________________

www.routledge.com

and receive FREE postage & packaging when spending £20 or more. (in UK only)

Please charge my debit/credit card:

Card number:

eBooks

Name on credit card: _____________________________________________________________ Issue No.*: _______

Over 20,000 of our titles are available as eBooks – available to browse at: www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk.

Start date: _______ /_______

Expiry date: _______ /_______

Security No.: (last 3 digits of security number on back of card)

Signature: ______________________________________________________________________ Date: ______ /______ /______ (order not valid without signature)

Get your FREE catalogues today! All of our subject catalogues are now fully interactive and available to download for FREE at www.routledge.com/catalogs. If you would like to request a paper copy, please email info@routledge.com.

Your Details

*only if paying by Maestro

– Please use block capitals.

First Name: Surname: Email: Department: Institution: VAT No. (EU Member States): Address: Postcode: Country: Telephone:

order your journals To purchase or to subscribe to any of our authoritative journals, please contact us using one of the methods below:

online: www.informaworld.com/journals

email:

telephone: +44 (0)20 7017 5544

tf.enquiries@informa.com

library recommendation To: From: Position: Department: Course(s) for which the book(s) would be relevant and why:

New Editions of the Bestsellers

Now available from Routledge

The City Reader, Fifth Edition Edited by Richard T. LeGates, Frederic Stout Part of the Routledge Urban Reader series The new edition of The City Reader reflects the latest thinking in each of the disciplinary areas included and in topical areas such as sustainable urban development, climate change, globalization, and the impact of technology on cities. The plate sections have been extensively revised and expanded and a new plate section on global cities has been added. January 2011 | 704 pages | Paperback: 978-0-415-55665-1 |

£31.99

Fundamentals of Geomorphology, Third Edition Richard Huggett This extensively revised, restructured edition is beautifully illustrated in full colour and, continues to present an engaging and comprehensive introduction to the subject, exploring the world’s landforms from a broad systems perspective. It covers the basics of Earth surface forms and processes, while reflecting on the latest developments in the field. March 2011 | 520 pages | Paperback: 978-0-415-56775-6 |

£32.99

Did you know that you can browse online content from the book before making your purchasing decision? Find out more today, visit www.routledge.com.

Explore our world renowned

Geography Journal Portfolio for FREE!

To find an impressive selection of free-to-view articles go to: www.tandf.co.uk/journals/offers/geography

Routledge

Page 11

Page 12

Page 31

Page 40

Page 41

Page 49

Page 50

Page 54

www.routledge.com/geography Routledge, 2 Park Square, Milton Park, Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4RN Tel: 020 7017 6000 Fax: 020 7017 6699 Email: geography@routledge.com Paper used in this catalogue is chlorine free and environmentally friendly. It is manufactured with pulp supplied from sustainable managed forests.